Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (15.27 MB, 229 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span>Date of preparing: 18/ 8/ 12 Date of teaching: 20/ 8/12 Period 1 Introduce English 8 . A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:- Students will be able to remind something about grade 7 - Help ss know some information about English 8 . - By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to know the way to learn English 8 well. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: learn English 8 well b. Skills: listening, speaking, reading, and Writing B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5'). III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities New lesson ; 2’ -Greeting A.Revision : The tenses : 5’ - Present simple: - Play the game S + V( s/es)/ To be (am/ is /are) - Present progressive : S + To Be + V_ ing +…. - Simple future : 17’ S + Will/ Shall … - Near future : To Be going to…. - Past simple: S + V( ed/ qkbqt)/To Be( was/ were).... *Teacher hang a poster, give some forms and uses . => Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of each tense Exercise : Change these sentences into other tenses ( Present simple , Present progressive , near future , Simple future and Past simple ) and add appropriate adverbs of time . 1. She is in Grade 7 => …………………………. 2. They are playing soccer =>…………………… 3. She went to Ha Noi last week. - Listen.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span> =>……………. 4. I will visit my sister next week =.>……………… 5. Mai is going to build a new house .=>…………… - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class . - Give feedback. - Look at the books - Copy down. B- Introduce English 8 - There are 16 units in this program , each unit has 6 parts Which mention a particular skill such as Listening . Speaking , Reading and Writing - Listen & answer + At the beginning of the unit is “ Getting 15’ started “ to lead in the new lesson or in order to warm up . -Each unit has Language Focus which help Ss to summarize basic knowledge they have learnt in each one . -Listen Introduce some books , reference books to students C- The ways to learn English well ; *T asks ss how to learn E well. - Learn vocabulary by heart. - Practice English everyday. - Do all the exercises at home. - Revise old lessons hard. - Play the game 4’. - Listen & copy. IV. Consolidation : - T asks ss what they have learnt . - T gets ss to play a game ; boardback. V. Homework : - Revise simple tenses & past simple tense. - T asks ss to prepare unit 1 : Getting started + Listen & read at home..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span> Date of preparing:18/ 8/ 12 Date of teaching : 21/ 8/12 Unit 1 - My friends Period 2 Getting started + listen & read . A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Hoa LAN ,Nien and read the dialogue for details and review simple present and simple past tenses . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus review simple present and simple past tenses . Skills :listening, speaking, reading, B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') -Asks Ss to retell 2 tenses to learned in grade 7. i. Warm up : Pelmanism meet come live think send thoug ht recei Met lived recei came sent ve ved - Remark and lead in new lesson T corrects and give marks . III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities II. Pre teach :T presents some new words 1. (to) describe : m« ta (example) 2. (to) smile: mØm cêi (mime) 3. (to) receive: nhËn (example) 4. (to) seem(-ed): cã vÎ (translation) ( next – door neighbor : l¸ng giÒng (example) 5. (a) classmate: b¹n cïng líp 6. enough (adj) : đủ (explanatireading III-Pre reading : Listen and read : 1.Questions : -T uses a picture on page 10 to introduce the lesson . -T asks ss to work in pairs to answer them : a. Is Nien Hoa’s friend or Lan’s friend ? b. How old is Nien ? c.Where does Nien live ? d. Is she a beautiful girl ? - T gets feedback. IV. While reading : - T asks ss to listen to the tape about the. T 2’. Ss’ activities - Ss answer. - Do individual. 5 - Listen and repeat in chorus, then individually. - Guess the meaning. - Copy down. - Rewrite words. 23 - Listen and answer..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span> dialogue between Hoa and Lan. - Then ss read the dialogue in pairs to check their answers. - T gets feedback: Answer key : a, She’s Hoa’s friend. b, She’s 12 years old. c, She lives in Hue. d, Yes , she is. - T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Ask ss to answer the qs on p.11 (part 2) in pairs : * Answer key : b, No, she doesn’t . c, The sentences is “She wasn’t old enough to be in my class ”. d, She is going to visit Hoa at Christmas. Gap filling : Language focus 1 - Ask Ss to use the present simple and simple past tense to complete the paragraph , using some verbs : live – send – be – come Hoa ..... in Hue last year , but now she ....in Ha Noi . Yesterday , Hoa ,s friend Nien ..... Hoa a letter . Nien ..... Hoa, neighbor when Hoa lived in Hue . She ..... younger than Hoa . She ..... to Ha Noi in December . - Get Ss to work individually and then compare their answers with their partners . - Give feedback lived – lives – sent – was – is - comes . - Asks Ss do exercise 1(16) - Call on some Ss to read the completed paragraph in front of class . V. Post - reading : Writing - Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Hoa and Lan . - Give Ss some cues and ask them to use the simple present or past tense to write individually . a.Lan / Hoa,s best friend b.They / same class / Quang Trung School . c-Last year / Hoa / to school first time .. - Let Ss discuss with their partners . - Choose some answers and correct them in front of the class VI. Consolidation : - What have you learnt ? V. Homework :. - Pair works.. - Open their books and listen to the tape. - Pair works.. - Pair works. - Work in close pairs. - Write the answers individual - Individual work. - Write the answers individually. -Reading a dialogue about Lan, Hoa and Nien. - Revise simple past tenses and past tense. - Do exercise. - Listen and copy. Read the complete paragraph aloud 4’. Write a paragraph about Hoa , Lan.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span> Date of preparing :20/ 8/ 12 Date of teaching : 25/ 8/12 Unit 1 - My friends Period 3 speak and listen . A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:- Help ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson; listen for details to complete the dialogue and speak to describe someone. - By the end of the lesson ss will able to describe someone and complete the dialogue by listening. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus review simple present b. Skills :listening, speaking, reading, B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') -ask ss to rewrite the new work and read again the dialogue III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T Students’activites 1 New lesson : 6 A. Vocabulary : - T elicits some new words. + (a) principal :ngời đứng đầu (example) + curly (adj) : xo¨n (tãc) (explanation) Ss answer. + slim (adj) : m¶nh kh¶nh (translation) + blond (adj) : vµng hoe (tãc) (translation) - Do individually. + bald (adj) : hãi ®Çu (translation) + straight (adj) : th¼ng (tãc ) (realia) +Ugly(adj)xÊu +Good-looking(adj): a nh×n +Pronounce(v):ph¸t ©m. +(to) marry:kÕt h«n 25 +rinkle(a)vÕt nh¨n + a fair complexion :níc da s¸ng - Check : What and where B. Speak and listen : - Listen and repeat after T. 1. Speak (p11- 12) : Describe someone - Guess the meaning. - T sticks some pictures on the b.b in order to present the new lesson. - Copy down. - T presents a short dialogue Hoa Lan - Rewrite words. A:This person is short and thin .She has long blond hair. B : Is this Mary ?. - Listen.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span> A : Yes . - T gets ss to practice the short dialogue. * Concept check : to describe someone. + Hair : S + have / has + adj + hair . + Body build : S + be + adj . * Practice : - T shows a poster of six people. - T calls a student to describe one of the people, the others have to guess who she / he is . - T goes on until 6 people on the poster are described. (If there’s time ask ss to describe a famous person or one of their classmates and their friends have to guess). 2. Listen (P.12- 13) +Pre- listening : -T guides ss how to do this exercise . - T asks ss to read 4 dialogues on p.1213;makes sure ss know the meaning of the expressions in the box. - T asks ss to guess. - T gets feedback : + While – listening : 1. I’d like you to meet. 4. It’s pleasure to meet you. 2. Nice to meet you. 5. Come and meet. 3. I’d like you to meet. 6. How do you do ! + Post listening : T asks ss to practice reading the dialogue. T corrects their pronunciation. Ask ss to write some more new words in L.F2 IV. Consolidation : - What have you learnt ? - T asks ss to do exercise L.F 3 (p.17) - Gets feedback. V. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary. - Describe one of your member in your family. - Do exercises : 3,4 –p.6,7 (Workbook). Date of preparing:27/ 8/ 11. - Listen and answer - Copy. - Free practice.. - Read 4 dialogues in individually. - Number from 1 to 6 in N.B, then guess. - Listen and check. - Pair work. Ss listen and complete the dialogues Read in pairs.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span> Date of teaching :30/ 8/11 Unit 1 - My friends Class;8a3-6 Period 4 read A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:- Help ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson. - Help ss read for specific information . - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know more about Ba’s friends. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus; review simple present b. Skills :reading, B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') -ask ss to rewrite the new work Call ss to describe one of your member in your family. - T corrects and gives mark. Warm up : * Chatting Ask Ss to look at four pictures on page 10 and talk about the activities they want to do after school or in their free time and ask some questions : 1.What are these students doing ? (play soccer / play chess /read books /play volleyball ) 2. What time of the day do you think it is ? ( in the morning / evening , after school ) 3. Do you like soccer / reading books ...? 4. Whom do you like playing with ? - Correct mistakes III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities 3. New lesson : A- Vocabulary : + T elicits some new words . -(n)character :tính cách, đặc ®iÓm(translation) - (n) orphanage : tr¹i må c«i (explanation) - sense of hamour : khiÕu hµi híc (example)(to) tell jokes : kÓ chuyÖn tÕu (translation) - sociable (adj) : dễ hoà đồng (translation) - reserved (adj) : kín đáo (translation) - outgoing (adj) : c¬i më (example) - (to) affect : ¶nh hëng (translation) + Check : Ro And Rm B- Read < P.13- 14 >. Students’ activities - Answer - Work individually. Work in groups.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span> + Pre- reading : 1.True or false statements prediction: - T uses a picture on p.13 to present the new lesson . - Then T hangs an extra board of T/ F statements on the board. - T asks ss to read and guess which statements are true or false : a) Ba only has 3 friends : Bao, Song , Khai. b) Ba and his friends have the same characters c) Bao, Song , Khai are quite reserved in public. d) They all enjoy school and study hard . - T gets feedback : a) – F ; b) – F ; c) – F ; d) - T + While – reading : - T asks ss to open their books and read the text on p.13 - T lets ss check their prediction . - T asks ss to correct false statements. 2. Multiple choice : - T lets ss to do exercise 1 on p. 14. - T asks ss to work in pairs to choose the best answers. - T gets feedback : a) – A ; b) – C ; c) – B ; d)- D 3. Comprehension questions : - T asks ss to work in pairs to do exercise 2 on p. 14. - T lets ss read the text again and answer the questions. - Then T asks ss to play a game “ Lucky numbers ”. 1- b ;2- a;3- LN;4- LN; 5- d ; 6- c;7- c ; 8- LN - Correct and give feedback a. He feels lucky having a lot of friends . b. Bao is the most sociable c. Khai likes reading d. His jokes sometimes annoy his friends . e. Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at local orphanage . + Post – reading : Ask ss to talk about their friends ( using the adjectives they have just learnt to describe). IV. Consolidation : - Ask ss what they have learnt today.. - Listen & repeat in chorusindividual. - Copy down.. - Rewrite words.. Listen , read & guess T/ F. - Pair work. - Pair work. - Work into 2 teams.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span> - Guide ss to do exercise 2 on p. 5,6 – W.B. V. Homework : - Remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary Date of preparing:29/ 8/ 11 Date of teaching : 31/ 8/11 Unit 1 - My friends Class;8a3-6 write Period 5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:- - Help ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson. - Help ss learn how to write about oneself and other people . - by the end of the lesson ss will be able to write a paragraph about their close friends. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus; review simple present b. Skills :writing B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. 2. Checking up : a, Qs :- Write vocabulary. - Do ex 2 – p.5,6 – W.B b, Key c, Form of checking : writing d, T corrects and gives remarks , mark II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') III. new lesson Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. New lesson : A/ Vocabulary : + T elicits some new words: - apperance (n) : diÖn m¹o (translation) - humorous (adj) : hµi híc (explanation) - helpful ( adj) : có ích , giúp đỡ (translation) - generous (adj):hµo phãng,réng lîng (translation) - slender (adj) : m¶nh mai(explanation) + Check : Ro & Rm B/ Write < p.15 > 1.Pre – writing : - T asks ss to read some information about Tam. and then answer some questions: a) What is his name ? b) How old is he ?. - Answer - Individually.. Play games - Listen & repeat in chorusindividual. - Copy down. - Rewrite words..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span> c) What does he look like ? d) What is he like ? e) Where does he live ? f) Who does he live with ? g) Who are his friends ? - T gets feedback : a) LVTam ; b) 14 ; c) tall & thin ; d) sociable, humorous e) 26 T.P street , Hanoi ; f) his father ; g) Ba and Bao 2.While – writing :Fill a similar form for your partner . - T asks ss to write some information about one of their friends . Name :..................... Age :..................... Apperance :.............................. Characters : ............................. Address : ................................. Family : ................................... Friends : ................................... - Then T calls on one student to read out their information - Ask Ss to write some information about one of their friends , then write a paragraph about her / him . - Get Ss to share with their partners and correct if possible . * Sample : His / her name ................ . He / she is .............. years old . He / she .........lives at ........... in .......... with ........... He / she is .............. . He / she has ...................hair . He / she is ...............helpful . He / she has ..................... friends , but his / her close friends are ............ and ............... . - Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud 3. Post – writing : - T asks ss to write a paragraph about their partner by using the form above to write . - T moves around the class and help ss , then T asks some ss to speak in front of the class about their partner. IV. Consolidation : - T asks ss what they have learnt today. - T guides ss to exercise 7 ( p. 11-12 – W.B ). - Read individually - Listen & answer. - Work individually to fill the form. - Work individually. - Listen & repeat. - Complete all the exercises . Write the paragraph.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span> V. Homework : - Remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - Ask ss to do exercises 7 ( p. 11-12 – W.B); exer.1( p.8-N.B) - Ask ss to prepare the next lesson Date of preparing: 29/ 8/ 11 Date of teaching : 1/ 9/11 Unit 1 - My friends Class;8a3-6 language focus Period 6 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Further practice in simple present tense and the structure : (not) + adj + enough + to-inf. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use simple present tense to talk about general truths and write some sentences using the structure (not) + adj + enough + toinf. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus; review simple present ,structure (not) + adj + enough + to-inf. b. Skills :writing ,speaking B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : a, Qs : - write vocabulary b, Key : c, Forms of checking : Writing / reading d, T corrects and gives remark, mark Warm up : * Kim,s game ( Using language focus 3 ) - Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 17 quickly . Then let them keep their books closed . - Divide the class into four groups . - Give Ss two questions , the group which answers correctly the fastest wins the game . * Questions: a. How many people are there in the picture ? b. What is each person wearing ? - The Woman is wearing a red shirt and a green dress. - The man who is standing beside the car is wearing brown trousers and a yellow shirt . - The man who is standing on the pavement is wearing a pink shirt and blue trousers . - The boy is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities Language focus 4 –p.17: - Answer 1. Presentation : T sets the scene to present the 1 structure “(not) + enough + to-inf ...” 0.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span> Hoa Lan Hoa: Can you put the groceries in your bag ? Lan : No, it is not big enough to carry everything. - T gets ss to read it in pairs. * Concept check : - Meaning : translate it into Vietnamese - Form : a,the same subject : S + to be / V + adj / adv + enough + to-inf. S + to be not / auxilary verb + not + Vm + adj / adv + enough + to-inf. - Use : a. Cách nói ai đó đủ hay không đủ ... để làm g× Eg : a) He is strong. He can play soccer. --> He is strong enough to play soccer. 20 2. Practice : - T asks ss to do ex4p.17 - T gets feedback. b) not old enough .c) strong enough .d) good enough. - Then T asks ss to do ex 2 p-9 – Notebook. - Gets feedback . Language focus1,2 Grammar : a. Present simple : S + V(es/s)…. eg: I go on holiday twice a year. * Present simple to talk about general truths - It is used to express an action which is always true . b. Past simple : S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + …. Ex 1: Complete the paragraphs . Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets - Ask Ss to work individually and then compare their answers with their partners . - Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud . - Correct and give feedback a. 1- lives 2- sent 3- was 4- is b. 1- are 2- came 3- showed 4- introduced Ex 2 : Complete the dialogue . - Ask them to read the words in the box . - Let them complete the dialogue between Ba and Tuan , his young cousin . - Call on some pairs to practice the complete dialogue .- Correct their pronunciation and give feedback . * keys : 1- sets 2- goes 3- moves 4- is 5- is 6- i IV. Consolidation :. - Write and read it individually.. - Play game in two teams Ss answer the T’s questions. - Listen & repeat in chorus- individual. - Copy down.. - Play game in 2 teams. - Listen to the T sets the scene. - Repeat in pairs. - Give form, use.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span> - T asks ss what they have learnt today. - T guides ss to exercise 5,6 ( p. 9,10,11 – W.B ) V. Homework : - Remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary and structures - Ask ss to do exercises 5,6 ( p. 9,10,11 exer.1( p.8-N) Date of preparing: 3/9/ 11 Date of teaching : 6/ 9/11 Unit 2 – making arrangements Class; 8a3-6 getting started –listen and read Period 7 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - - Help ss understand the words and phrases given in the lesson. - Help ss read for details about a conversation on the phone . - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to use the telephone to make and confirm arrangements . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus Arrangements by telephone –going to b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : a- Questions : Do exercises 5,6 ( p.9->11-W.B) c- Forms of checking : writing d- Correction , remark , giving mark . III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities A. Getting started : T asks ss to guess and 1’ - Answer match each object with its name. - T gets feedback and asks ss to repeat . 6’ a. an answering machine : máy tự động trả lời - Work individually b. a mobile phone : điện thoại di động c. a fax machine : m¸y nhËn göi fax d. a telephone directory : danh b¹ ®iÖn tho¹i e. a public telephone : ®iÖn tho¹i c«ng céng f. an address book: sổ ghi địa chỉ B. Listen and read :(p.19) - Work individually Pre-teach : * Elicits and present some words : - (to) hold on : đợi máy nhé 25’ -(to) bit far / alittle bit far :kh¸ xa . Copy down new words . -(an) arrangement : sù s¾p xÕp . - Repeat in chorus - ( to ) agree :đồng ý -Listen to teacher sets the Pre- reading :.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span> Open prediction : - Set the scene “ Hoa and Nga are talking on the phone . They are talking about going to see a movie “ - Ask Ss to guess : a. Who made the call ? b. Who introduced herself ? c. Who invented the other to the movies ? d. Who arranged a meeting place ? e. Who arranged the time ? f. Who agreed to the time ? - Have them work in pairs to guess the answers . - Call on some pairs to report the answers and write them on the board . While – reading : - Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the conversation between Nga and Hoa , then give them feedback . * Answers : a. Nga made the call b. Nga introduced herself . c. Nga invited Hoa to the movies . d. Nga arranged a meeting place . e. Hoa arranged the time . f. Nga agreed the time . - Get some Ss to read the conversation aloud . Correct pronunciation if any Comprehension questions : - Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in pairs to answer them . ( T. hang a poster on the board ) 1. What is Hoa,s telephone number ? 2. Which movie are they going to see ? Where 3. How is Hoa going to see the movies ? 4. Where are they going to meet ? What time ? - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class . -answering the questions ( open pairs) Model sentences ( T. hang some structures grammar on the board )]+ Be going to – infinitive ( chi du dinh tuong lai ) + Adverb of places -Here / inside / outside / there / upstairs / downstairs ….. Post- reading : * Role play : - Ask Ss to play the roles of two Ss who are talking on the phone making arrangements .. scene . -Ss guess and answer the questions . - Work in pairs.. Work in pairs Read their predictions Listen to the tape , read the conversation to check their prediction Practice asking and answering the questions - Work in pairs. * Possible answer : 1. Her telephone number is 3847329. 2. They are going to see the movie Dream City at Sao Mai Movie Theater . 3. Hoa is going by bike . 4.They are going to meet outside the theater at6.30 Read the conversations aloud ( in pairs ) Demonstrate in front of class . Practice asking and answering the questions copy down on their notebooks.. -Work in pairs Play the roles of the dialogue.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span> IV. Consolidation : - T asks ss what they have learnt today. - T guides ss to do exercises 1,2 (p.10 – N.B ) V. Homework : - learn by heart vocabulary and structures - Ask ss to do exercises 5,6 Date of preparing: 4/9/ 11 Date of teaching : 7/ 9/11 Unit 2 – making arrangements Class; 8a3-6 speak +lf1,2 Period 8 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Help ss practice talking on the phone . - By the end of the lesson will be able to talk on the phone about intention with “ going to” fluently 2. Objectives: a. Language focus Arrangements by telephone –going to b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : . - Write vocabulary . - Do exercise 2 ( p. 11- 12 – N.B) Warm up : * Chatting - Talk to Ss to about using telephone . 1. Do you have a telephone at home ? 2. How often do you make a phone call ? 4. What would you say if you are the caller ? III. new lesson Teacher’s activities New lesson Pre- speaking - Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs to put the sentences in the correct order to make a complete conversation . - Call on some pairs to read their answers and write them on the board : - Call on some pairs to practice the conversation they have arranged . While - speaking : - Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are making. T 30. Ss’ activities - Answer - Work individually. Some ss to answer the T’s questions Work in whole class.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span> arrangements to play chess “ - Ask Ss to work with partners to complete the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to play the roles of Ba and Bao to practice the dialogue . - Listen and give feedback Bao : May I speak to Ba , please . This is Bao . Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ? Bao : can you play chess tonight ? Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ? Bao : I’ll meet you at the Center Chess Club . Bao : Is 2,00, OK ? Post – speaking : - Ask Ss to make similar dialogue . T can emphasize (nhan manh )the useful phrases and sentences -- Ask Ss to make similar arrangements and practice talking with a partner . -Ask Ss to make sentences with “ Going to + Infinitive “ Practice : Model sentences : S + BE + GOING TO + Infinitive => Express an intention *Word cue drill : a. see a movie ( Yes ) b. play / sports ( No ) c. meet your friends ( Yes) d. help your mother ( Yes ) e. do your homework (No) f. watch TV ( No ) - Model two cues , then ask Ss to repeat chorally then individually . - Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs. IV Consolidations : Retell contents of this lesson. V_Homework : Write five things that they intend to do next week . And learn by heart main structure grammar . Prepare the next lesson. Work in pairs Report their answers Answers 1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c 7- e 8- k 9-g 10- h 11- d Listen to teacher carefully . Work in pairs. Practice the complete dialogue. - Work in groups of 3 or 4 the similar dialogue . Listen and copy down. - work individually. Practice asking and answering - work in pairs ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span> Date of preparing: 5/9/ 11 Date of teaching : 8/ 9/11 Unit 2 – making arrangements Class; 8a3-6 listen +lf3 Period 9 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Listening for details Ss will be able to complete a telephone message by listening . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus Listening for the telephone message b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : . - Write vocabulary . III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 3. New lesson Revision words: 6 -Junior high school :Trêng thcs ‘cÊp 2 -The principal : hiÖu trëng . -at the moment : ngay lËp tøc -an) appointment: cuéc hÑn -available : cã hiÖu lùc Look at the form of the telephone Listening 35 message and listen to the scene . Pre- listening : - Ask Ss to look at the form of the telephone Guess the message message on page 21 and set the scene “ a woman phoned the principal of Kingston Read their predictions junior high school , but he was out .” - Have Ss guess the message . - Let Ss work in pairs - Call on some Ss to read their predictions Listen to tape carefully , compare and write them on the board . with their predictions . While - listening : - Turn on the tape twice and ask Ss to fill in - work in pairs. the message , compare with their predictions.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span> . - Call on some Ss to read their answers after checking . - T give them marks * Answers : Kingston junior high school Date : .Tuesday .................. .Time : ................. For : The principal Message : Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9 . 45 in the morning Telephone number : 6463720942. T. corrects and gives answer keys. - Call on some Ss to read them aloud , T give them marks Post - listening : - Ask Ss to make a dialogue about the information they have heard - Go around the class and help them . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue they have made .. Read their answers. Work in pairs to make dialogue . Practice in front of class Listen and copy down. work individually. - Make a dialogue . -work individually.. IV Consolidations : - Retell the main points of this lesson . V Homework : 1. Copy the dialogue above . 2. Do exercise in workbook . 3. Learn by heart the main points and new words. 4. Prepare the next lesson ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span> Date of preparing: 11/9/ 11 Date of teaching : 12/ 9/11 Unit 2 – making arrangements Class; 8a3-6 read Period 10 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: To read the paragraph for details about Alexander Graham Bell -To know more about A.G.Bell and his invention -To tell a story about A.G.Bell and finish the exact information about him -To educate the students to love the scientists from their great inventions 2. Objectives: a. Language focus Simple past b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : . - Write vocabulary . III. new lesson.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span> Teacher’s activities T 3. New lesson : 1’ A- Vocabulary : - T elicits some new words +(to) emigrate : di c ( translation ) 6’ +transmit:truyÒn,dÉn translation ) +(to)conduct:tiÕn hµnh, thùc hiÖn ( translation) + (to)demonstrate;biÓudiÔn(explanation +adevicethiÕt bÞm¸y mãc ( translation +a deaf – mute : ngêi c©m ®iÕc - Check : Ro and Rm B- Read (p.21- 22 ) 6’ 1. Pre- reading : + T / F statements : - T hangs an extra board of T / F statements and asks ss to work in pairs to guess which are true or false statements ( exercise 1 – p.22 ). I guess a. T/F. Ss’ activities - Answer - Work in pairs. a) upstairs b) outside c)downstairs. - Listen & repeat in chorusindividual. - Copy down. I read F ( Edinburgh ). d) here e) there f) inside. - Rewrite words..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span> IV. Consolidation : - T retells some informati9on about G.Bell. - T guides ss to do exercises in W.B & N.B V. Homework : - T asks ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - T asks ss to read the text about G.Bell fluently. - T asks ss to do the exercises III, IV .P.13-14 N.B - T asks ss to prepare the next lesson: + Teacher’s preparation : lesson plan, a poster + Ss’ preparation : books, notebooks, workbooks.. Date of preparing: 9/9/ 12 Date of teaching : 10/ 9/12 Unit 2 – making arrangements Class; 8a1-5 write Period 10 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: To help the students write a message -By the end of the lesson ,students will be able to write a telephone message -To take a message in English and to use vocabulary relating to telephone perfectly 2. Objectives: a. Language focus Simple past b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : - Write vocabulary . a.Questions : - Do exercise III – p.13. - Answer the questions about G.Bell: 1, When was he born ? 2, What did he invent ? 3, When was it invented ?. d. Correction , remark , giving mark III. new lesson.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span> Teacher’s activities T 3.New lesson : 6’ I.Vocabulary: T elicits some new words. + a customer :kh¸ch hµng (explanation) + a delivery service:dÞch vô ®a hµng đến tận nhà (translation) +stationary(n):v¨n phßng phÈm (translation) +(to) pick sb up : đón ai (translation) +(to)reach : liªn l¹c example) - Check : Matching II. Write ( p.23-24) 25 Pre- writing : T asks ss some questions : ? Have you taken a telephone message? ? When you take a message? ?What should be mentioned in the message? - T sticks a poster in front of the board. - T asks ss to work in pairs to fill in the gap. - T gets feedback - T asks ss to read the message & fill in the gap( check their prediction). - T gets feedback : 1 phoned 2 May 12 3 speak 4 took 5 – name 6 – delivery 7 – Mr.Ha 8 – at Then T asks ss to read the massage aloud. While – writing : Write the telephone message. - T asks ss to read passage 2 on p.23 to get information and write the massage. - Let ss write individually then share with a partner. Thanh Cong Delivery Service Date: June 16 Time: After midday For: Mrs. Van Message: Mr. Nam called about his stationery order. He wanted you to call him at 8634082. Taken by : Mr. Toan - Call some ss to write their messages again on the board Post – writing : Write a message for Nancy. - T asks ss to write another message. - T sets the scene : “ Tom phoned. Ss’ activities. Play game individual. - Listen to the T . - Repeat in chorus- individual. - Copy down. - Match words.. -> Yes, I have. - Answers :1) phoned ; 2) May 12 ; 3) speak 4) took ; 5) name ; 6) delivery Mr. Ha;8) At - Read and check their predictions individually. - Read part2 p.23,24 - Individual work - Pair work + June ,16 + After midday. + Mrs. Van + Mr.Nam called about his stationary order. He wanted you to call him at 8.634.082. + Mr. Toan.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span> Nancy , but she was out . Lisa , Nancy’s sister took a message for Nancy. Help Lisa to write a message.” - T asks ss to read the dialogue between Lisa and Tom , then write the message.. - Copy down - Read messages aloud. - Listen the dialogue between Lisa and Tom , then write the message. - Work in groups to write another message. * Answers: Date: ( ......) Time: ( ..... ) For: Nancy. IV. Consolidation: Retell what they’ve learn V Homework : - Ask ss to learn vocabulary by heart. write a message to a friend. - Ask ss to do all the exercises in W.B - Ask ss to prepare the next lesson. Date of preparing : 9/ 9/12 Date of teaching :11/9/12 Class; 8a1- 5 Period 11 language focus A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: -To help the students review the main structures to complete some exercises. -To enable students to use the structure “be going to” to talk about intention and use some adverbs of place to complete the speech bubbles. -To make the students be aware of importance of intentions to have plan clearly 2. Objectives: a. Language focus - talk about intentions with “be going to” -adverbs of place b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : - Write vocabulary . III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities .New lesson Language focus 1,2 Listen to the teacher and answer ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span> -Asks the students to answer the 4’ questions +What do you do if you have a 35’ toothache? +What do you do if you have a ticket? -All right. Now look at this sentences “Nga has a movie ticket” What is she going to do? -Good .That is the way to talk about intention with “be going to”. Today we will say what the people are going to do. Give example and ask ss to give form Ask ss to do ex 1. Lg2 a) Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class . - Listen and give feedback . b) Get Ss to work in pairs - Have some pairs demonstrate in front of class . - Give feedback Lg3: Complete the speech bubbles . Use each adverb in the box once Adverbs of place * Jumbled words - Let Ss work individually , one student one word 1. tdeousi = outside 2. siiden = inside 3. hetre = there 4. erhe = here 5. stupairs = upstairs . 6. wonstaird = downstairs - Ask Ss to go to the board and write the meanings words . - Call on some Ss to read all the adverbs aloud . - Set the scene : “ Ba is playing hide and seek with his cousin , Mr Tuan “. +I go to the dentist +I go to the movie +She is going to see a movie. I. Grammar points 1. Talk about intentions with be going to -S+ am/ is/ are going to +inf. .ex Say what the people are going to do a. They are going to go fishing . b. She is going to read it. c. She is going to do her Math homework d. He is going to watch an action movie on TV tonight. e. She is going to give him a birthday present. Work in pairs Stick in column “You “ and Your partner - Demonstrate in front of class .. Work individually , one student one word. Go to the board to write the meanings and read them aloud . Listen to the scene . Work in pairs Read out the speech bubbles.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span> - Let Ss work in pairs , then compare with another pair ( at their table ) Read the complete sentences aloud . - Call on some Ss to read out the speech bubbles - Give feedback a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is upstairs b. No , he is not here . c. He is not downstairs and he is not upstairs . d. Perhaps , he is outside . e. No , he is not there . Play game to review two main structure f. I am not outside . I am inside , Ba. - Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences Write homework IV.Consolidation -Has students play “chain game” to review two main structures. Divides some groups says a sentence. -I’m going to see a movie tonight V Home work -Learn the structure by heart. -Prepare for the next period Date of preparing: 15/9/ 12 Date of teaching : 17/9/12 Unit 3– at home Period 12 getting started listen and read Class; 8a1-5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: Help ss read the dialogue for details and practice modal verbs :must / have to / ought to - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the dialogue , use modal verbs to talk about the housework . - Develop 4 skills : L, S , R & W 2. Objectives: a. Language focus - Modal verb, reflexive pronouns b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') T. asks Ss some questions : What did you do to help your mom after school? - Asks some Ss to answer the questions . T. corrects and give them marks. * possible answers :.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span> - cook meal/ wash clothes / Tidy up / Feed the chicken / sweep the floor III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities A. getting started 33’ - T shows 6 pictures to students. - Ask ss to look at 6 pictures in 30’ and try to remember the verbs in the pictures as many as Individual work possible . a. wash dishes - T gets feedback: d. cook a. wash dishes d. cook b. make the bed b. make the bed e. tidy up e. tidy up c. sweep the floor f. feed the chicken c. sweep the floor - Then T asks ss some questions f. feed the chicken B Vocabulary ; - T elicits some new words. + a steamer : nåi hÊp (explanation) + a cupboard :tñ ly (translation) - Listen and repeat in chorus + a sauce pan :xoong , ch¶o (realia) individual. +chore (n) : c«ng viÖc nhµ (example) - Guess the meaning. + a sink : bån röa (picture) - Copy down + a frying pan : ch¶o r¸n (realia) + a rice cooker: xoong c¬m ®iÖn (explanation) + a stove : bÕp lß (explanation) - Check : What and Where - Listen C Listen and read : - Read the dialogue in pairs 1. Pre teach : Dialogue - T sets the scene of the dialogue between Nam - Individual work and his mother , Mrs. Vui - Play game in 2 teams. - T gets ss to listen to the dialogue (while - Find and write looking at their books). Nam has to cook dinner. - T asks ss to complete the list of the things Nam go to the market has to do. call his aunt - T asks ss to find modal verbs in the dialogue be at grandma’s and give form. house - have/ has to - ought to +V-inf - can Eg: I have to sweep the floor everyday Model : What do you have to do ? I must do the washing up . 2 language focus 3 - Listen and answer - T sets the scene : “You do your homework and - Copy no one helps you , what do you say?’’ I do my homework myself. Eg: I do my homework myself. pron. reflexive pron. pron. reflexive pron. - Individual work: -T explains the reflexive pronouns : it is used to - Share their ideas emphasis a person or a thing. - Read the dialogue again.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span> - Eg : Mary saw herself in mirror . pron. reflexive pron. - T asks ss to do L.F3( p.35-36) - T gets feedback : 1.ourselves 2. myself 3. yourself 4. himself 5. herself 6. themselves 7. yourselves. - Remember the form of the reflexive pronou. IVConsolidation : - T asks ss what they have to learn. V . Homework : - Remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - Ask ss to read the dialogue fluently. - Ask ss to do exercises 1,2p.22- 23 (W.B)& ex.3- p.20( N.B) - Ask ss to prepare the next lesson:. Date of preparing: 15/9/ 12 Date of teaching : 18/9/12 Unit 3– at home Period 13 speak Class; 8a1-5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Help ss practice speaking about the position of each item . - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to use the preposition of place to talk about the position of furniture in the house . - Develop 4 skills : L, S , R & W 2. Objectives: a. Language focus present simple b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Warm up : * Kim,s game - Divide class into 2 teams.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span> - Show the picture of a chicken to Ss . - Ask them to study the things in the picture - Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down as many things as they can remember - Which team having more things win games III. new lesson Teacher ‘ s activities T Students ‘ activities speaking Pre - Speaking : - Ask Ss the positions of the items in the 33’ pictures . Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl . Where is the flowers ? They are on the table Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the Practice asking and answering bowl of fruit . about the positions of each item . Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above the counter . Where are the knives ? They are on the wall , under the cupboard . Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter , next to the bowl of fruit . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions . While - speaking : Work in pairs - Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about the position of each item Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the Read all the sentences aloud . stove . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in + The sink is next to the stove . front of class. + The cupboard is on the wall , - Give feedback : above the counter . - Ask them to read all the suggested sentences + The knives are on the wall , aloud . under the cupboard . *speak 2 + The bowl of fruit is between the Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new furniture rice cooker and the dish rack . for her living room , but she can not decide + The clock is on the wall , above where to put it . You should help her to the fridge . arrange the furniture” + The flowers are on the table . Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about Listen carefully . their ideas . Ask Ss to practice speaking : If they agree , they may use : Ok ,You are right If they disagree , they may use : No , I think we ,d better / ought to put ... I think it should be ... Copy down Example : - Let us put the clock on the wall , between.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span> the shelf and the picture . - OK . I think we ought to put the TV and the stereo on the shelf ….. - Call on some pairs to practice speaking . Post –speaking Ask ss to talk about the position of furniture in their living-room .. Read the examples. Practice speaking . Listen and copy . IV-Consolidation : - Retell the main contents of this lesson. V-Homework : 1. Describe their bedroom . 2. Do exercise in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span> Date of preparing: 16/9/12 Date of teaching : 18/9/12 Unit 3– at home Period 14 listen Class; 8a1- 5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Help ss listen to a conversation understanding how to make a meal and practice.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span> reflexive pronouns - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to identify the right item. - Develop 4 skills : L, S , R & W 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: present simple b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : Write the position of the furniture in the bedroom Correction, remark , giving mark III. new lesson T's activities T Ss'activities . New lesson : A. Vocabulary : T elicits new words 1, ham (n) : thịt muối ( explanation ) 5' 2, a teaspoon of salt : một thìa muối (realia) 3, garlic (n) : củ tỏi (realia) 4, (to) fry : rán (example) 5, (to) smell : ngửi (mime) - Listen and repeat in chorus, 6, delicious ngon (adj) (explanation) then individual * Check : Ro and Rm. B. Listen (p.30) : 35’ - Guess the meaning - Copy down I - Pre listening : 1,Special Chinese fried rice : - T points to the pictures on p.30 and then asks ss to predict what they are . - Rewrite words. - T asks ss to copy the table on the bb and fill in the " I guess" column. Ss have to write things they use to cook the Special Chinese fried rice - Look at the pictures and - T gets feedback. answer.. I guess. I listen 1 a, a fried rice 2 b, pan 3 c, garlic and green peppers 4 d, ham and peas II - While listening : - T asks ss to listen to the tape and check their predictions.. - Copy the table. - Individual work then compare with a partner. I guess : a, a fried rice b, pan c, garlic and .... - Listen and check..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span> - T gets feedback. 2, Ordering : - T asks ss to listen to the dialogue again and order the recipe to make the Special Chinese fried. - Copy. - Pairs work.. rice.. a, put the ham and peas in. b, heat the pan. c, put a little oil in the big pan. d, put the rice and a teaspoon of salt in. e, fry the garlic and the green peppers. * Answer key : 1-b 2-c 3-e 4-a 5-d III - Post listening : - T asks ss to work in a groups of 5 to retell the recipe to make the Special Chinese fried rice. ( if they do well , teacher will give them marks ).. - Work in groups. - Listen to a conversation to understand how to make a meal.. IV. Consolidation : - Ask ss what they have learnt today. - Can you tell me how to make fried eggs ? V. Homework: - Remind ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Ask Ss to write the recipe to make "Special Chinese Fried Rice" and " boiled rice " -do ex 3 in workbook.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span> Date of preparing: 16/9/12 Date of teaching : 20/9/12 Unit 3– at home Period 15 read Class; 8a1- 5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: Reading for details about safety precautions in the house and further practice in Why-qs and answers with Because. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to understand the safety precautions in the house and use "Why - Because" 2. Objectives: a. Language focus Modal verbs, question with Why – because b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') a) Write vocabulary. b) Retell about how to make the special Chinese fried rice. T corrects - remark - gives mark. warm up T: How many people are there in your family? Are there any children? What do we do to keep safety for children and members in a family answer electricity. drugs. Dangerous gas cooker. III. new lesson T's activities. T. . New lesson : I I- Vocabulay : T presents some new words 1-kill (v) giết chết 2-out of children’s reach: ngoài tầm với của trẻ 3-destroy (v) phá huỷ. 5’. Ss' activities - Do individually. s cooker.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span> 4-injure (v) làm bị thương 5-cause (v) gây ra 6-candy (n) kẹo 7-dangerous (adj) nguy hiểm 8-suitable (adj) phù hợp * Check : Matching III - Read : safety precautions in the house - T sets the sence : Lan's mother , Mrs Quyen, is at her local community center. She is reading one of the posters on the wall: safety precautions in the house. 1) Pre - reading : A-True / False statements prediction (Ex 1 - p.3 Statements Guess Key 1. It is safe to leave medicine F around the house . 2. Drugs can look like candy . T 3. A kitchen is a suitable F place to play . 4. Playing with one match can F not start a fife . 5. Putting a knife into an T electrical socket is dangerous . T 6. Young children do not understand that many house hold objects are dangerous . - T asks ss to read the statements on extra board and guess which is true os false. Then T gets feedback. 2) While - reading : - T asks ss to read the poster on p.31 and check their predictions. - T gets feedback. * Answer : a, F b, T c, F d, F e, T f, T Comprehension questions (p.32):Why- Because - T asks ss to give the use of the qs and answer with "Why - Because" - Then T asks ss to work in pairs to do exercise2 - T gets feedback. 3)Post - reading : . Discussion - Ask Ss to work in groups, discussing about the topic . 1. Safety precautions in the street .. 35’. - Listen and repeat in chorus, then individual - Guess the meaning - Copy down - Match words.. - Listen to the t.. - Read and guess individually. a, F b,T / F c, F / T d, T / F e, T / F f, T / F - Work individually 1st then compare with a partner. - Read and check their prediction individually. - Copy and correct. Listen and answer - Pair work. a--> It's safe to keep medicine in looked cupboards. c-> A kitchen is a dangerous place to play. d-> playing with one match can cause a fire. * Answer : b, Because it is a dangerous place c, Because one match can make a fire. d, Because children do not try to put anything into them. e, Because they are dangerous. Discuss about the topic.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span> 2. Safety precautions at school .. IV. Consolidation : - Ask ss what they have learnt today. - T guides ss to do ex 4 - Lf on p.36,37 - T gets feedback. V. Homework: - Remind ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Do ex 1,2 on p.18,19 - Ex.B Date of preparing: 22/9/12 Date of teaching : 24/9/12 Unit 3– at home Period 16 write Class; 8a1- 5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to write a description of a room in their house. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus there is / there are…. b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') -Write vocabulary. -talk about the danger in the home for children. * Warm up : * Chatting ( Asking something about the room on page 32 ) 1. Which room is this ? 2. What is this ? / Where is it ? III. new lesson T's activities T Ss' activities New lesson : ' A,Pre - writing : Introduce the aims and - Do individually: dug, electricity, some new words to Ss : 4' boiling water , fire, gas , knife 1. Pre- teach vocabulary : - folder (n): bìa (dùng để cắt dán thủ - Play game c«ng) --> This is a bedroom. - beneath(pre) : Kho¶ng díi > < above. 4’ --> It is a o'clock ..... - dish rack (n) : giá để bát đĩa . (Picture) - lighting fixture (n) : đèn chùm (Picture) - Listen and copy the title of the - Container : (n) cái đựng , cái chứa ( chai , lesson . l * Checking : Rub out and remember 33 - Listen and repeat in chorus , 2. Reading ’ individually ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span> - Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa,s room , then ask some comprehension questions : a. What is there on the left of the room ? b. Where is the bookshelf ? c. What is there on the right side of the room d. Where is the wardrobe ? Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Corrects and gives feedback : - Call on some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa,s room aloud . III / While - writing : - Ask Ss to describe Hoa,s kitchen , using the given cues (W.2 p.33):. Guess its meanings and copy .. - Play game - Read the description and practice asking and answering the questions a. There is a desk on the left of the room . b. The bookshelf is above the desk . c. There is a window on the right side of the room d. The wardrobe is beside the window and opposite the desk . '. - Read the description aloud .. - Ask Ss to share with their partners .(work in group) - Call some goups to write their topic - Corrects the mistakes from some descriptions if any . - Gives feedback .. . IV / Post- writing :. Write their topic This is Hoa,s kitchen . There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room . Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and next to the sink is a towel rack . The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right of the window and beneath the selves . On the selves and on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea . In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table and four chairs . The lighting fixture is above the table , and directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers . Talk about their room. Speaking.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span> - Ask Ss to talk to their partners about their room / living room / kitchen . - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in front of class . IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main contents of this lesson. V. Homework : Write a description of their living room . Prepare the next lesson: Date of preparing: 22/9/12 Date of teaching : 26/9/12 Unit 3– at home Period 17 language focus 1,2 Class; 8a1- 5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to use modals: must / have to / ought to 2. Objectives: a. Language focus modals: must / have to / ought to b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') - a) Questions : talk about your room. b) Keys : Ss answer about themselves. c) Form of checking : speaking. d) Correct, remark , give marks. III. new lesson Teacher's activities T Ss' activities . New lesson : ' A- Vocabulary: - Answer the teacher's questions - T elicits some new words . 6' +(to) dust : phñi bôi +(to) sweep : quÐt + (to)empty : trèng rçng + (to)tidy : dän dÑp - Listen and repeat in chorus + tank (n ): c¸i thïng individually + a fish tank :bÓ c¸ + garbage (n) : r¸c - Copy down + (to) fail : trît - Check : Ro and Rm. B- Language focus 1, 2 : Modal verbs 30’ - T asks ss to retell modal verbs.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span> *Note : +Ought to / should are used to express an advice or offer + Must / have to are used to express an obligation. *Note : + Must : sù b¾t buéc xuÊt ph¸t tõ ngêi nãi, tõ những tình cảm, mong muốn do ngời nói đề xuÊt. + Have to : diÔn t¶ sù b¾t buéc do ngo¹i c¶nh đa đến, không phải do bản thân ngời nói c¶m thÊy hay mong muèn nh vËy. - T asks ss to do language focus 1,2 on pages 34-35. - T gets feedback: a) Language focus 1:. b) Language focus 2 : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the pictures ( Language focus 2 ) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class His tooth / Hoa / late My room / ache untidy The floor / Bao / She / thin dirty overweight My English / Nam/play The washing bad game all day machine / not work - T guides ss to do exercise1 ( on page 20 W.B - T elicits some new words : + short- sighted (n): cËn thÞ + project (n) : dù ¸n + (to) deliver : giao , ph¸t - T gets feedback. IV. Consolidation : - T asks ss to repeat what they have learnt.. - Rewrite words. Listen and answer: can / must / may / might / have to/ ought to / should - Give an ex: You should work hard ought to * Form. S + ought to + V (bare) ought not to * Use: "ought to" or "should" is used to give advice to somebody - Copy - Make examples - Pair work - Write down in notebooks 1.have to tidy 4. clean 2.have to dust 5. empty 3. must sweep 6. have to feed. - Practice in front of class. - copy down if necessary. - Work in pairs b. You ought to get up early. c. You ought to eat less. d. You ought to go to the dentist. Play game in two teams.. - Individual work.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span> - T guides ss to do exercise 2 on p.20-21 (W.B ) v. Homework : - T asks ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - Ask ss to do exercises 2- W.B; 1,2 on p.16 , 17 - N.B; ex.1 on p.18 - N.B. T's preparation : lesson plan, extra exercises. Ss'preparation : the structure's grammar, book, notebook and exercise book. Date of preparing: 25/9/12 Date of teaching : 26/9/12 Period 18 REVISION FOR THE TEST Class; 8a1- 5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate all structure grammar from unit 1 to unit 3 .They can to do all exercises in work book. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus reflexive pronouns, modals, questions and answer with why and because, is going to, enough b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') - a) Questions : talk about your room. b) Keys : Ss answer about themselves. c) Form of checking : speaking. d) Correct, remark , give marks. III. new lesson Teacher's activities T Ss' activities . New lesson : 1' A- Grammar : - Repeat all grammar structures Ask ss to retell the grammar from unit 1 to unit 4' 3 and give example - Listen and copy Tenses: The simple present tense: 35’ - Repeat all grammar structures - T asks ss to retell the uses and the forms of the simple present tense2. The near future with "be - Listen and copy going to-inf "--> to talk about intention. Structure " not adj + enough + to -inf". Eg: He is not old enough to get married..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span> Modal verbs: Must Have to + inf Ought to Reflexive pronouns : T gives ss the forms of the reflexive pronouns: I --> myself You --> yourself / yourselves He --> himself She --> herself It --> itself We --> ourselves They --> themselves B- Exercise : Ex 1 : 1. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences: 1. He’s tall and thin. He has _______ A. black hair short B. short black hair C. hair short black D. black short hair 2. Our son is old enough to look after _______. A. himself B. herself C. myself D. ourselves 3. The lighting fixture is ______ the dinner table. A. above B. on C. beneath D. under 4. Deaf-mutes can _______speak ________hear. A. both – and B. either – or C. neither – nor D. not only – but also 5. Don’t let your little brother play with the ballpoint pen. It can _________________him. A. move B. sweep C. injure D. destroy 2 Rewrite each sentence keeping the same meaing: 1. Your little brother can’t study in this school because he is still young. Your little brother isn’t __________________ 2. Her hair is short, curly and blonde. She has______________________________ 3. Driving too fast is very dangerous. It __________________________________ 4. Do you plan to invite her to your birthday party ? Are _______________________________. - Ask Ss to go to the board to do exercises. 3. Look at the piture and describe the bedroom with the things below: 0. This is my Lan’s bedroom 1. There / a desk / the left / the room 2. There / a chair / the desk 3. The bed / the middle / the room 4. On the right side / the room there / a window 5. The clock / the wall, / the bed 6. The bookshelf / the wall, /the desk. '. Do all exercise Ex1;choose the best answer 1-b 2-a 3-a 4-c 5-c. Ex2 rewrite the sentence 1-Your little brother isn’t old enough to study in this school 2-she has short curly blond hair 3-it is dangerous to drive fast 4-are you going to invite her to your birthday party ? Ex3 1-there is a desk on the left of the room 2-there is a chair next to the desk 3-the bed is the middle of the room 4-on the right side of the room there is a window 5-the clock is on the wall ,above.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span> 7. The wardrobe / the desk 8. The cushion / the bed. the desk 6. the bookshelf is on the wall ,above the desk 7-the wardrobe is opposite the desk 8-the cushion is on the bed. gets feedback all exercises T's preparation : Test 4. Consolidation: - T asks ss to repeat what they have revised. 5. Homework : - T asks ss to learn by heart all grammar Date of preparing: 2/10/11 Date of teaching : 4/10/11 Period 20 written test Class; 8a3- 6 I/ Objectives : Check ss' knowledge Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to do the test well II/ Language contents: 1/ Vocabulary: (reviewing) 2/ grammar: reflexive pronouns, modals, questions and answer with why and because, is going to, enough III/ Technique: Question and answer, repetition , explanation IV. Procedures Teacher's activities T Ss' activities 1.Organization: Greet and check ss' attendance. 3. New lesson : - Teacher delivers paper tests to students. - Let ss do the tests:. 1'. - Greet and answer - Do the tests individually. I / Multiple choice 1. ... does Lien live ? a. what b. which c. where 2. ... does Hoa look like ? a. who b. what c. which 3. My brother isn’t old enough ... to school alone. a. going b. go c. to go 4. Bao will picks you ………. a. up b. down c. in II/ Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentence. 1. She ( be) a good student……………………. 2. We (buy) some books yesterday………………….. 3. Our friends (watch) a game on T.V at the moment……………………….. 4 Ba’s teacher ( give) him a lot of homework last week………………………….
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span> IV/ Đọc đoạn văn về Tim Caldwell sau đó hoàn thành bảng thông tin dưới: My name is Tim Caldwell. I'm twenty years old and I am a student. I am not married. I live at 25 Cathedral Melboure, Australia with my parents and my younger sister. I'm tall and thin and I have short brown hair. My girl friend is secretary. Her name is Glenda and she's 18 years old. She is very nice. In this photo we're with her parents at their home. Name: .......................................... Age: ........................ Description: ................................................................... Address: ......................................................................... Family: .......................................................................... Friends: ......................................................................... III/ Complete sentences use the words given. 1. Hoa/ usually/ read book/ recess 2. Nam/ have/ short black hair. 3. She/ usually/ get up/ early.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span> Date of preparing: 3/10/11 Date of teaching : 5/10/11 Class: 8a3-6 Unit 4- our past Period 21 getting started –listen and read +lf1 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to talk about the past, using structure “used to + inf” & simple past tense. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus used to + inf” & simple past tense. b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') - T gets ss to play a game: Kim's game. - T asks ss to look at the picture on the screen 30'' and then write the names of the things that do not belong to the past ( Ss write 30'') - T gets feedback: +The television +The radio + The mobile phone + The light picture + modern clothing / school uniform III. new lesson Teacher's activities T Ss' activities New lesson : 1' Vocabulary: - T elicits some new words : 5' +(to)look after :tr«ng nom,ch¨m sãc - Listen and repeat in chorus + equipment : thiÕt bÞ ( translation) individually.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span> + folk tale (n) : truyÖn d©n gian ( realia) + great grandma (n): cô bµ ( explanation) + (to) use(-d)to-inf : thêng hay , quen ( translation) - Check : Ro and Rm. Listen and read (p.38-39) 1.Pre- questions : T uses the picture to introduce the dialogue and predict Fact or opinion? (p.39) - T asks ss to read the statements part 3 on p.39 and decide which is a fact and which is an opinion. - T gets feedback: a- F c- F e- 0 b- F d- F f- 0 2. While - reading : Turn on the tape 2 times T asks ss to read the dialogue in pairs and find out the answers. Ask ss to read the text and check the prediction Ask ss to read the text and answer the question a. She used to live on a farm . b. Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom to look after her younger brothers and sisters . c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house and wash the clothes . d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great father used to tell stories . e.She asked her grandma to tell her the tale“The lost shoe“ 3. Post-reading : Play a game : Nought and crosses. she / climb He/play the He/ play tree piano soccer He/go to They/skip they/watch class late rope TV together She / us the she / cry at They/play folktale night computer game *language focus 1 Asks ss to write the past simple form of each verbs Run –ran. - Copy down. 25 - Listen - Individual work - Answer. - Pair work - Listen and answer - Repeat - Copy the answers. - Listen and answer. - T.W / individual work. - Play game in 2 teams. eg : She used to climb tree.... - Talk about the things they used to do in the past - Listen and copy. Write.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span> Go-went….. Iv. Consolidation : - T asks ss to repeat what they have learnt. V. Homework : - T remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary and a new structure. - Ask ss to read the dialogue carefully and fluently . - T asks ss to do exercises 1,2,3(p.27,28 - W.B); 1,2 (p.21, 22-N.B. Date of preparing: 9/10/11 Date of teaching : 10/10/11 Unit 4- our past Period 22 speak and language focus 2, 4 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use USED TO to talk about the things they used to do 2. Objectives: a. Language focus used to + inf b. Skills :reading ,writing ,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : a) Questions : Make some examples with " used to" b) Keys : Ss' asnwer c) Form of checking: speaking d) correct , remark , give marks. Warm up : Jumbled words - rieletcicty = Electricity - menttaenterin = Entertainment - rkmaet = Market - permasuekt = Supermarket III. new lesson. Teacher's activities. T. Speaking Pre - speaking : 20 Recall the conversation between Nga and her grandma , then ask “ Where did Nga,s. Ss' activities - Greet & answer - Individual work. I used to get up late..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span> grandma always live ? “ -> She always lived on a farm . - Ask : “ Another word for always lived “ . Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and answer. “ Where did Nga ,s grandma use to live ? “ She used to live on a farm . Form : S + Used to + inf S + did not use to + inf Did + S + use to + inf ? Expressing a past habit , or an action usually happened in the past . Practice Word cue drill a. Live / Hue / Hanoi b. Have / long hairs / short hairs c. Get up / late / early d. Walk to school / bicycle e. Study / evening / early morning - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the cues above . While - speaking : - Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open pairs . - Ask them to compare 2 pictures , using “ USED TO “ to talk about the actions in the past , using these ideas below : 1. Where did they live in the past ?And now ? 2. How did they travel ? 3. What is about the electricity ? 4. What is about their life / work ? 5. Did children use to go to school ? 6. What is about their entertainment ? - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback .. Language focus 4 - T asks ss to do L.F 4 (p. 45). ...... Play games - One by one to go to the board to write.. Listen and copy. Practice speaking with cues Work in pairs Demonstrate in front of class - One by one - copy down if necessary * Suggested answers : 1. People used to live in small houses . Now they live in big houses and buildings. 2. People used to walk . Now they can go by cars or motorbikes . 3. Now , there is electricity everywhere . 4. People used to work hard all the time . Now they have a lot of time for entertainment . 5. Most children used to stay at home . Now , they all go to school 6. Children used to play traditional games such as hide and seek , skip rope ... outdoors . Now , they have a lot of modern games – video games . 5 - Do L.F4 - pair work.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span> - T gets feedback Language focus 2 Asks ss tocomplete the dialogue below - T gets feedback. 5. - Copy down 1. used to have 2. used to be 3. used to live -do lf 2 work in pair. IV. Consolidation : - T asks ss repeat what they have learnt . V. Homework : - Ask ss to learn by heart the structure "used to-inf". - Ask ss to do exercises - Ask ss to prepare the next lesson :. Date of preparing: 10/10/11 Date of teaching : 11/10/11 Unit 4- our past Period 23 listen A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Help ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson; listen and F.P in the past simple tense. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the main idea of a story by listening and F.P in the past simple tense. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus simple past b. Skills :,listening B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') a) Questions ; asks ss to speak about the way things used to be and the way they are now b) Keys : ss' answer c) Form of checking : Speaking d) Correct , remark , give mark III. new lesson. Teacher's activities .New lesson : A- Vocabulary: - T elicits some new words ; + foolish (adj): ngèc , ngu xuÈn (translation) + greedy (adj): tham lam (example). T 6. Ss' activities - Greet and answer - Individual work Last year I used to stay up late. Now , I don't stay up late.etc....
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span> + (a) gold egg : qu¶ trøng vµng (picture) +(to) lay- laid : đẻ(trứng) example) +(to) discover : kh¸m ph¸, ph¸t hiÖn ra (translation) +excited (adj) : hµo høng, phÊn khëi (explanation) - Listen and repeat in chorus + amazement (n):sù söng sèt, sù ng¹c nhiªn individually (translation) +(to) be dead : bÞ chÕt (translation) - Copy down - Check : What and Where B- Listen (P.41) 30 Pre-listening : - T uses a picture to present the new lesson. 1. Ordering the pictures: - T sticks pictures on the board and asks ss to - Play game in 2 teams order the pictures. - T gets feedback. - Listen - T asks ss to listen to the tape - Check ss' prediction - Look at the pictures and - T gets feedback: order the pictures 2. T or F statements: - Individual work - T sticks a poster with sentences : While- listening: - Listen and check( match: - T asks ss to listen to the tape. pictures with suitable Questions: sentences below) 1 .Did a farmer live a poor life with his family? 2 What animals did they feed ? 3. Did his chickens lay eggs ? 4 .One day ,what did he discover when he went to collect the eggs? 5. What did he decide to do when finding a gold - Pair work egg? 1. No, he didn't. 6. What happened after he had finished to cut open 2 .Chickens. all the chickens ? 3 .Yes, they did. 7. What is the most suitable moral lesson ? 4. A gold egg. + Don't kill chickens. 5. He decided to cut open all +Don't be foolish and greedy. the chickens. + Be happy with what you have. 6. All the chickens were dead. + It's difficult to find gold. 7. Don't be foolish and greedy. Post- listening: retell the story: - T sticks the pictures on the board and asks ss to retell the story. - Individual work - T gets feedback. - Listen a story"A gold egg". - The past simple.. IV Consolidation:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span> - T asks ss to repeat what they have learnt; which tense is used. - T asks ss to retell the main of the story"A gold eggs". - T guides ss to do exercise II ( V. Homework : - Remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - Ask ss to do exercise II - Ask ss to prepare the next lesson. +Teacher's preparation : lesson plan, textbook , pictures. +Ss' preparation : books , notebooks , workbooks.. Date of preparing: 10/10/12 Date of teaching : 14/10/12 Unit 4- our past Period 25 Class: 8a1-5 read A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to understand the story “The lost shoe” and learn a moral lesson. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus The simple past tense, make + sb + inf b. Skills :reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') a)ask ss to write the new words b) Keys : ss' answer c) Form of checking : Speaking d) Correct , remark , give mark III. new lesson. Teacher's activities New lesson : A- Vocabulary ; - T elicits some new words : + a fairy : bµ tiªn (explanation) + a prince : hoµng tö (example) + ray (n) : quÇn ¸o r¸ch (realia) +(to) drop : đánh rơi mime) +(to) marry : cíi, kÕt h«n example). T. Ss' activities. - Listen and repeat in chorus individually - Copy down.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span> + cruel (adj): độc ác (antonym) + upset (adj): buån rÇu mime) + magically(adv): mét c¸ch kú diÖu (translation) - Check : Slap the board B- Read : The lost shoes (P.41- 42) Pre- reading: Ordering the pictures. - T shows 10 pictures on T.V and asks ss to order. 1. 2. 3. -Play game in 2 teams. - Look at the pictures - Think and order the pictures : A-1 b –2 c –3 …… -Listen and read then check their order - Read the questions given - Work in pairs to find out the answers - Take part in the game into 2 teams.. 4. 5. 6. - Copy the answers - Read. 7 8 9 - T gets feedback: While-reading: - T asks ss to listen and read the story"The lost shoes" *Answer the questions (P.42): - T shows six questions on the screen and asks ss to read them. - T makes sure ss understand all the questions. - T gets ss to play a game : Lucky Number Complete the sentences with words from the story. - T asks ss to read all the sentences given. - T asks ss to work individually and then pair -compared - T gets feedback :. - Work individually - Pair - compared - Copy the answer Answers: A - She was a poor farmer's daughter. B - She made little Pea do chores all day? C - Because he was very upset and he soon died of a broken heart. D - Little Pea got new clothes from a fairy. E - The prince decided to marry the girl who owned the shoes..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span> A – farmer B - died C - had to / again D - choose / marry E - new clothes F - lost Post- reading: Retell the story - T asks ss to look at the pictures and retell the story "The lost shoes". - T gives good marks if they do well.. F - Ss' answers. - Individual work to retell the story: - Read the story again - Try to remember the contents of the story. - Listen and copy - Complete all the exercises. IV. Consolidation : V. Homework : - Remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - Ask ss to complete exercise III (p.23- N.B). Date of preparing :15/10/11 Date of teaching: 17/10/ 11 Period :25 Giving back and correcting the test 45' A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Help ss realize their mistakes in the test. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to avoid mistakes . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus grammar from unit 1to unit 3 b. Skills B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : a) Questions: Asks ss to retell the story “The lost shoes” b) Keys: ss’ answer c) Form of checking: speaking d) Correct , remark , give mark III. new lesson. Teacher's activities. T 2’. Ss' activities. 3. New lesson : + T gives back ss the test . + T comments on the test: *Advantages : 8’ - Lots of ss know how to perform the test, write - Listen and repeat. beautifully. - Many ss understood and used grammar structures fluently.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span> Disadvantages : 35 - There are some of dirty tests performed . ’ - Copy. - Ss make dictation mistakes. - Careless letters. - Some of ss don't know how to use tenses : simple present, present continuous, simple past, passive form - Some of ss did the test badly. + T repeat ss some grammar structures they have learnt in units 1-> 4. + T says ss' marks. + Then T rewrites ss' marks into teacher's notebook. Vi. Consolidation : - T remind ss to remember knowledge they have learnt . V Home work:T asks ss to revise and remember grammar structures given in units 1-->4..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span> Date of preparing: 12/10/12 Date of teaching : 15/10/12 Unit 4- our past Period 26 WRITE Class:a1-5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to write the story “How the tiger got his stripes” again. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus ;The simple past tense b. Skills :writing ,reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Warm up: Chatting Do you know tigers? How does it look like? Are there any stripes on its body? Do you know why it has stripes? Let’s read to find out how the tiger got his stripes. III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities New lesson: A- Vocabulary; -T elicits some new words: + wisdom( n): trí khôn translation) +stripe:(n) sọc, viền ( visual) + straw : (n) rơm,rạ ( realia). T 5. Ss’ activities - Greet and answer - Individual work.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span> + servant (n) đày tớ ( explanation) + (to) escape: trốn thoát ( translation) + (to) tie : trói chặt ( mime) + (to) grace : gặm cỏ ( visual) + (to) burn : đốt cháy ( mime) -Check : Ro and Rm. B- Write : The story “How the tiger got his stripes”. +Pre- writing: today we are going to learn how to write a story 1.Complete the story. Use the verbs in the box. - T sets the scene : -T makes sure ss understand all the words given. -T asks ss to work in pairs. -T gets feedback : + While-writing :Answer the questions: - write the story. Imagine you are the man. Use the words to write the story (p.43) (exhibition). - T asks ss to work in groups. Each group does 1 or 2 sentences. Change ; the man I ; his my correct the mistakes. - Teacher remarks and gives marks +Post- writing : Telling the story - Divide the class into 2 teams . Team A plays the role of the tiger . Team B plays the role of the buffalo - Ask them to work in team , telling the story Notice : - Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - > I. - Listen and repeat in chorusindividually. 30’ - Copy down.. - Rewrite words. - Listen - Pair work 1- appeared 2- was 3- said 4- left 5- went 6- tied 7- lit 8- burned 9- escaped - Copy the answers - Work in groups Key: One day as I was in the field and my buffalo was grazing nearby. A tiger came. It asked why the strong buffalo was my servant and I was its master. I told the tiger I had wisdom. The tiger wanted to see it. I told the tiger I left my wisdom at home then I tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because I didn’t want it to eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw and burned the tiger. The tiger escaped but it still has black stripes from the burns today. -Group work. VIConsolidation: -T asks ss to repeat what they have learnt. V.Homework:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span> -T reminds ss to learn by heart vocabulary given in the unit.. Preparing date 12/10/12 teaching date: 16/10/12 PERIOD 27 language focus 1,2,3 Class :8A1-5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to understand and know more about the simple past tense, prepositions of time 2. Objectives: a. Language focus ;The simple past tense b. Skills :writing ,reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') . Checking up : Write by heart the vocabulary Retell the story III. new lesson. time 5. Teacher’s & Students’ activities Activity 1: -T writes some verbs on the board.. Contents.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span> 15. 10. -Ss find out the irregular verbs in the simple past.(Ss work in pairs). -Some SS write the verbs on the board. -T corrects the mistakes. -T gives some verbs to Ss. -T asks Ss to look at past 2 and guide Ss to do exercise.(Now in order to review the usage and structure of the past simple tense, you work in pairs, complete the small dialogues ). -Ss work in pairs. -Some pairs of SS practice before class. -T corrects and gives the answer key. Activity 2: -T asks SS to use the prepositions in the table to complete the sentences. -Ss do exercise. - Some Ss speak before the class. -T gives the correct answer. -T emphasis. -Ss copy and notice. Activity 3: -T guides SS to repeat the structure and usage of USED TO. -SS repeat and write on the board. -T corrects the mistakes. (+) S +used to +V infinitive. (-) S + didn’t use to + V Inf USED TO dùng để diễn tả một hành động đã xãy ra trong quá khứ.. -T asks Ss to complete the dialogue. -Ss work in pairs.. VII. Language focus: 1. Write the past simple form of each verbs:. a. b. c. d. e. f.. Run - ran fly - flew take - took go - went have - has do - did. g. h. i. j. k.. be-was/were ride - rode eat - ate sit - sat come- came. 2. Complete the dialogue below. Use the past simple: a-Lan: Did you eat rice for breakfast? -Nga: No. I ate noodles. b- Ba: How did you get to school? - Nam: I took a bus to school. c- Minh: Where was you last night? - Hoa: I was at home. d- Chi: Which subject did you have yesterday? -Ba: I have Literature. 3. Complete the sentences. Use the prepositions in the table. a. On b. in c. between d. at ......... after e. before *Note: in + month, year, seasons On + date ( on 17th) On + day, date of a month. At + time (at 7 pm). 4. Look at the pictures. Complete the dialogue. Use used to and the verbs in the box. (+) S +used to +V infinitive. -Some pairs of Ss practice aloud (-) S + didn’t use to + V infinitive before class. * Usage: (1) I used to have long hair..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span> -T gives the answer key. the prepositions of time.. (2) She used to be my next-door neighbor. (3) They used to live in Hue , too.. IV-Consolidation : - Retell the main points of this lesson : VHomework : -ask ss to learn by heart the tense again -Pepare the new lesson. Date of preparing 20/10/12 Date of teaching: 22 /10 /12 PERIOD :28. Class: 8a1-5. Unit 5: Study habits. Lesson 1: Getting started. Listen and read. A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Help ss listen and read the dialogue for details. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus ; need + to-inf, ask + sb + to-inf, reported speech b. Skills :writing ,reading ,listening ,reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') warm up - Ask ss to tell the subjects they have learnt at school. - Ask ss to answer some questions: What subject are you good/ bad at? What subject do you like best? How often do you have math? ” III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities .New lesson: A- Vocabulary: -T elicits some new words : + a report card : phiếu báo cáo, phiếu ghi. T. Ss’ activities. 6’ - Listen and repeat in chorusindividually.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span> điểm ( realia) + pronunciation (n): phát âm ( example) - Copy down + semester (n)= term: học kỳ (synonym) + (to) improve : trau dồi (translation) + (to)be proud of : hãnh diện, tự hào ( explanation) 35’ + (to) learn by heart : học thuộc lòng ( translation) + (to) try one’s best : cố gắng hết sức ( example) - Checks: Ro and Rm. B- Listen and read (p.46- 47) - Listen and answer *Pre- reading: - Individual work - T sets the scene. 1. T /F statements prediction ( exercise2- Pair work p.47). - T asks ss to read the statements on the screen and predict. - Listen and read - T asks ss to share their ideas with their - Pair word partners. - T gets feedback - Check the answers * While- reading: a T/F - T asks ss to listen to the tape script and read b F individually. c F - T asks ss to read the dialogue in pairs and d T/F then work in pairs to check their predictions. e T - T gets feedback: f F/T - T asks ss to copy the answers. - Then T asks ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Copy the answers 2. Answer the questions: - Pair work - T asks ss to read 5 questions on page 47. - T makes sure ss understand all the - Read the questions questions. - Think of the answers - T gets ss to play a game: Lucky Number. a- He is Jim’s teacher. -Take part in the game b- He gave Jim’s mother a report card. c- Jim studied hard. d- Miss Jackson said Jim should work - Copy harder on Spanish pronunciation. e- She gave him a dictionary. *Post - reading: Speaking. - T asks ss to work in groups. - T asks ss to stand up and asks each other the questions: - Group work “What subject do you need to improve?”. - Ss have to write the names and the subjects that their friends answer..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span> Name Mai Huong. What subject Math English. - Then T asks ss how to improve the subject that they are not good at. T give model sentence :She asked me to give you this dictionary IV.Consolidation: - T asks ss to repeat what they have learnt. - T guides ss to do exercises. V.Homework: - Ask ss to learn by heart vocabulary. -Remind ss to read the dialogue carefully and correctly. -Ask ss to do exercise 2 (p.30- N.B) and exercise 1 (p.32- W.B). - Ask ss to prepare the next lesson – Speak. Date of preparing: 21/10/12 Date of teaching 24/10/12. Unit 5: Study habits. Lesson 2: Speak +listen. Class:8a1-5 Period 29 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: - Help ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson and practice speaking about subjects at school and listening for specific information to fill in a report card and practice adverbs of manner and modal verb “should - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to talk about their subjects at school and their 2. Objectives: a. Language focus ; : present Simple Tense b. Skills :writing ,reading ,listening ,reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up : call ss to write by heart the vocabulary Warm up : III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities Speaking 35’ Read all the ways of improving Pre - speaking : English . Introduce the topic of the speaking ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span> - Call on some Ss to read the possible answers above and copy down . - Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes. While – speaking : - Asks Ss work in groups of three or four .in the tables. Ask each other about your studies. Use the questions and words in the boxes to help them. 1. When do you do your homework? ( after school / after dinner / late at night / … ) 2. Who helps you with your homework? ( your parents / your brother / your sisters / ) - Asks Ss do exercises in the text books in page 48 . - T gets feedback. Call some pairs to talk loudly. - Others listening. * Model : Lan said she did her homework after dinner He / she said ……… - Call on some pairs to read the model - Ask Ss to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class. - Correct mistakes if any . Post - speaking : - Ask Ss to write with information above . Eg : Lan ,s elder brother helps him with his homework . - Call on some Ss to read their writings . listen : A- Vocabulary : -T elicits some new words : + behavior- participation (n): tinh thÇn tham gia giê häc + days present (n) :sè ngµy cã mÆt (example) + days absent (n) : sè ngµy v¾ng mÆt (antonym) + cooperation (n) : sù hîp t¸c (translation) + a comment : lêi nhËn xÐt (explanation) + a signature : ch÷ ký (explanation) + a grade : ®iÓm (realia). Copy in their notebooks .. Listen and read the model , then copy Work in pairs Practice in front of class. Work individually . Read their writings - Ss works in pairs . - copy down some keys if necessary. Write with these information Some pairs to practice. - Listen and repeat in chorusindividually - Copy down. - Individual work - Pair work - Listen and check - Copy the answers 1- 87 days present. 5 – A..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span> + satisfactory><unsatisfactory: đạt >< không excellent đạt 2 – 5 days absent 6 – A. - Check : Matching. excellent B- Listening : 3 – satisfactory 7 – B. *While – listening : good -T asks to listen to the tape and check their 4 – C. fair predictions. - T gets feedback. a- Mr.Lam and Mrs.Linh. *Post – listening : b. English. For 1st term. 2. Answer the questions : c. 5 days. -T asks Ss to answer the questions given. d. Speaking. a- Who are Nga’s parents. e. Yes, she does. b – What subject was reported? For what term? c – How many days did she miss? d – What are the comments e – Does she need to improve her listening skills? - Gets feedback: IV_solidation: -Retell the mains points of this lesson .( Some Ss to retell) V.homework 1. Copy the effective ways of learning English they have found out . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . Date of preparing:30 /10 /11 -Unit 5: Study habits Date of teaching:2/11/11 Period 30+31 Read A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: -Help Ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson; read a text about how people learn new words; practice commands, requests and advice in reported speech. -By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use reported speech with commands, requests and advice. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus ; : reported speech with commands, requests and advice. b. Skills :writing ,reading ,listening ,reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') Checking up: a) Questions :.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span> - T asks Ss to practice F.P 1 on page 52. b) Keys : 1- hard 2- fast 3- softly 4- badly c) Forms of checking: Speaking. d) Correct, remark, give marks . Warm up: Chatting T asks Ps some questions bout learning new words. Ps : answer the questions III. new lesson Teacher’s activities 3.New lesson : A- Vocabulary : *T elicits some new words : + mother tongue (n) : tiếng mẹ đẻ explanation) + (to) underline : g¹ch ch©n ( mime) + (to) high light : lµm næi bËt ( translation) + (to) come across: t×nh cê gÆp ( translation) + (to) stick : d¸n vµo, dÝnh vµo ( mime) + (to) revise: «n tËp + (to) read aloud : đọc to ( realia) *Check: Ro and Rm. B- Read ( p.49) : - T sets the scene: today we’ll read a text to introduce how to learn well. *Pre-reading : 1. True or false statements (p.50) - T asks Ss to read all the statements on a poster and decide which is true or which is false. 1. All language learners write the meaning of new words in their mother tongue. 2. Some learners write one or two example sentences with each new word they want to learn 3. Every learner tries to learn all new words they come across. 4. Many learners only learn new words that are important. 5. Revision is not necessary. - T gets feedback. *While- reading : - Then T asks Ss to listen to the tape (open textbooks and read follow). T asks Ss to read the text carefully and check the answers. - T gets feedback : 1.F:all ->some 2. T 3.F tries to learn -> do not try 2. Answer the questions (p.50).. T 1’ 6’. Ss’ activities - Listen and repeat in chorus – individually - Copy down. 30 - Listen and guess 1- T / F 2- T / F 3- F / T 4- T / F 5-F - Listen and read - Check - Copy - Pair work - Answer - Copy the right answers - Group work - Listen and answer - Copy a- No, learner learn words in different ways. b- Such sentences help them remember the use of new words. c- To remember words better, learners write examples, put the words and their meaning on stickers, underline or.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span> - T asks Ss to read all the questions given on p.50. - T explains the questions that Ss don’t understand. - T lets Ss work in pairs to discuss the questions - T gets feedback: *Post- reading: - T asks Ss to work in groups to find out more ways to learn new words : + Learn by heart new words. + Translate them into mother tongue. - T gets feedback:. highlight them. d-They may think they can’t do so instead, they learn only important words. e- Revision is necessary in learning words. f- Learners should try different ways of learning words to find out what is the best.. VConsolidation : T asks Ss to repeat what they have learnt. V. Homework:- T reminds Ss to learn by heart vocabulary. Date of preparing1/11/12 Date of teaching :2/11/12. Unit 5: Study habits. write. Period 32 Class :8a1-5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter in English following the model. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus ; : : simple past, simple present, near future. b. Skills :writing ,reading ,listening ,reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, tape 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') . Checking up : Questions : - Ask ss to work in pairs to say how to learn new words. Correct ,remark , give marks..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span> Warm up : Chatting 1. Have you ever written to someone ? 2. To whom do you usually write ? 3. What do you often write about ? III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities. T. New lesson: A-Vocabulary: 5’ - T elicits some new words: +Lunar New Year Festival: TÕt ©m lÞch (visual ) + Mid-Autumn Festival :tÕt trung thu explanation) + Ñnoyable (adj) : vui vÎ (synonym) + (to) celebrate(-d): tæ chøc (translation) + (to) receive(-d) >< send: nhËn (antonym ) -Check : Ro and Rm. B-Write (p.50- 51) 30 1.Ordering: *Pre- writing: - T cuts the letter into 7 pieces. - T asks ss to work in groups to put them into the correct order to form a letter. a- Write soon…. your news. b- Thanks for …. Vacation. c- Regard. d- Dear Jim, e – We received …. Next semester. f-12 Tran …..10, 2002. g- It is almost ….from there. -T gets feedback: *While- writing: - T asks ss to open the book on p.51 and read the letter to check their order. Answers: 1 – f 2- d 3- b 4- e 5- g 6- a 7- c - T asks ss to identify the sections of the letter. - T gets feedback : Answer : 1-B 2- D 3- A 4- C - T asks ss to tell the part of the letter: +What are there in the heading? + What is the main part of the letter? writing : - T asks ss to do on p.51. - Ss have to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter to her penpal Donna in Sans Francisco, using the given information.. Ss’ activities - Speak - Pair work. Play games. - Listen and repeat in chorus - individually - Copy down. - Look at the pieces - Answer: 1- f 2- b 3- d 4- c 5- g 6- a 7- e - Check the answers - Copy the right answer +heading/opening/body/closi ng +The writer’s name, a date +The body of the letter - Read the cues given on p.51 - Individual work I received my second semester report last month.I got good grades for Geography, Physics and math, but my English and.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span> - T explains the words that ss don’t understand. - T asks ss to write the heading of the letter. - T asks ss to write this letter depend on the letter in exercise 1. Eg : Dear Donna, Thanks for your letter .I’m pleased to hear you had an enjoyable Mother’s Day….. - T asks ss to work individually. *Post – writing: - T asks one or two ss to read aloud their letters. - T listens and corrects ss’ mistakes.. History results were poor. My teacher told me to improve Eng and History. I think I’ll have to study harder next school year. In a few weeks we’re going to celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival. That’s a moon festival in autumn or Fall in VN. I’m going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus this afternoon and I’m going to stay there with them until after the festival. I’ll send you a postcard from there. Write soon and tell me all your news. Best, Lan. IV.Consolidation: - T asks ss to repeat what they have learnt. - T guides ss to do exercises in W.B & N.B. V.Homework: - Remind ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - T asks ss to do exercises in W.B & N.B. - Remind ss to prepare the next lesson- Revision. Date of preparing: 5/11/12 Date of teaching :5/11/12. Unit 5: Study habits. revision. Period 33 Class :8a 1-5 A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to understand and know to use reported speech. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus;Model “should”, Command, requests and advice in reported speech b. Skills :writing ,reading ,listening ,reading B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster, 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5') III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities 3.New lesson:. T. Ss’ activities.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span> 1-revision . To report a command or request : 10 -listen and copy (+) S + asked /told + O + to-inf… ( -) S +asked / told / requested /commanded + not + to-inf... 2.To report advice : * S + said + should / ought to / had better + V + O …. + shouldn’t/ oughtn’t to/ had better - Practicing commands, requests not + V + O… & advice in reported speech. + advised+ O + (not) + to-inf + O Reported speech: 2-practice a-Miss Jackson asked me to wait Reported speech: 20 her outside his office a. Miss Jackson said: “Please wait me outside b-. Miss Jackson told me to give my office ?” you your report card for this b. Miss Jackson said: “Please give Tim his semester”. report card for this semester”. c. Miss Jackson asked me to c. Miss Jackson said: “Can you help Tim with help you with your Spanish his Spanish pronunciation?” pronunciation d. Miss Jackson said: “Can you make me next d. Miss Jackson told me to make week?” her next week?” Choose the word or phrase that best Choose the word or phrase completes each unfinished sentence below that best completes each 1. You__________take the baby to the unfinished sentence below doctor. 1-a 2-b 3-c 4-b A. should B. ought C. need D. have 2. The doctor__________he should take a few days off. A. say B. said C. ask D. tell 3.He was more than a little proud __________himself. A. about B. to C. of D. for 4The Chinese team ______in the competition last week. A. work very hard B. worked very hard C. work very hardly D. worked very hardly VI. Choose the underlined part that needs correction. 1-He said that his mother was A B a badly cook.. ’. VI. Choose the underlined part that needs correction 1-c (bad) 2-c (on ).
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span> C D 2-I should work harder at my A B C English pronunciation. D 3-I got good grades at English A B C D and History yesterday D 4-They write the meaning of A B new words by their mother tongue. C D. 3-c(for) 4-c(in). ’. -get feedback IV. Consolidation: - Ask ss to retell what they’ve consolidated in this period. * commands , requests, advice in reported speech. V. Homework: - Ask ss to learn by heart the structures’ grammar. - Prepare for the next period “ Unit 6 : Getting started- Listen and read” + T’s preparation: Textbook, lesson plan, CD, cassette, poster. + Ss’ preparation: Textbook, notebook, and reference book.. Date of preparing: 6/11/12 Date of teaching :9/11 /12. Unit 6: the younger pioneers club. Getting started -listen and read _L f2. Period 34 Class :8a1-5 AThe aims and objectives : 1- The aims By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue about the young pioneers .Ss Will be able to use the simple present tense with future meaning 2- Objectivies a-Language contents: Structures: Using modal verbs. present simple tense. b- Develop Ss’ speaking skill. B-Preparations : 1-teacher :book ,lesson plan ,poster ,radio 2- students :book ,notebook C-procedures : I. Organization 2’ -Greeting - who’s absent today ?.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span> II. checking up the previous lesson +warm up :5 * Warm up : * Chatting Ask Ss some questions about their activities and their summer holidays . 1. What do you often do on your summer holiday ? 2. Are you members of the Young Pioneers and Youth Organization ? 3. Are there any activity programs for the summer ? 4. Do you take part in them ? 5. What activity do you like most ? III.new lesson. Teacher’s activities A-Vocabulary: -T elicits some new words. + (to) enroll : ®¨ng kÝ vµo, ghi danh. (transl) + handicapped: khuyÕt tËt(explanation) + (to)sign : ký (mime) + an application form: đơn ghi danh sách (exa) + a rest home : n¬i ®iÒu dìng (ex) + (to)support: hç trî (exa) + elderly people: ngêi giµ (ex) + blind people : ngêi mï (ex) * Check: Ro and Rm. B- Getting started (P.54) -T asks ss to do identify the activities that the HCM young pioneer an Youth organization participate in. - T gets feedback. C- Listen and read (p.54-55): - T sets the scene: Nga is a student in grade 8. She wants to enroll in the activities for the summer. - T asks ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same time. - Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,s particulars . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class. - Give feedback * Name : Pham Thi Nga * Home address : 5 Tran Phu Street * Phone number : Not available * Date of birth : April 22 , 1989 * Sex : Female Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting D- Ask Ss answer some questions : + What is her name? + What does she live? + When was she born? + What are her hobbies? - Call on some Ss to answer the questions. * Concept checking. T 5. Ss’ activities. - Listen and repeat in chorus and individually, then copy Play game 5 20 - Rewrite words. - Listen to the tape - Read the dialogue - Work in pairs - Report their results in front of class..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span> - What is after “likes”? -> drawing - What is after “enjoys”? -> acting - What do you call “ drawing”and “ acting’-> gerund - What is the form of “gerund”? -> V- ing - Answer the questions - When do we use “gerund”? - > after some verbs: ( whole class ) like, love, enjoy, hate, mind . - Copy down. * Form Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund * Drill : word cue drill - Listen and copy the - Prepare 5 cards with these cues on them : form. Then practice a. play soccer / volley ball b. watch TV / listen to music T – Class c. read books / do homework Side- Side d. Chat with friends / do the housework Open pairs e. Cook meal / decorate the house. Close pairs - Call on Ss to practice asking and answering - Practice reading the - Correct mistakes if any. dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue. - Work in groups - Give feedback by asking Ss to report their => What are your , 5 hobbies? friends hobbies. *I like / love playing LF2 soccer and volleyball. Ask Ss to copy down the chart and work in groups * I don’t like playing of three to ask their friends and tick on the chart. badminton. What have you learnt? IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson: V. Homework : 1. Write about their friends hobbies. - Learn vocabulary, Grammar by heart Date of preparing9/11 /12 Unit 6: the younger pioneers club Date of teaching : 11/11 /12. speak +lf3. Period 35 Class :8a1-5 AThe aims and objectives : 1- The aims - Help ss practice asking for favor. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for favors and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance. 2- Objectivies a-Language contents: Structures: Using modal verbs. present simple tense. b- Develop Ss’ speaking skill. B-Preparations : 1-teacher :book ,lesson plan ,poster ,radio 2- students :book ,notebook C-procedures : I. Organization 2 -Greeting.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span> - who’s absent today ? II. checking up the previous lesson +warm up :5 - Call ss to re-write the new words by heart -do lf 2 again * Warm up : 5 * Shark, s attack - Cut out a shark and a school girl / boy from card - Draw some steps , then stick the cut out girl / boy on the top of the steps , the sharks in the sea - Draw 5 gaps for the word – favor III. new lesson :. Teacher’s activities Pre-speaking: 5, Task 1: Teacher: What can you say when you want some one to do something? Teacher writes the phrases and sentences on the board and explains the way to use While-speaking: 10 First speaking: Students work in pairs to ask for favor and respond to the favor, and offer assistances and respond to assistances. Getting feedback Second speaking: Introducing the situation of the dialogue. Teacher explains the cues and asks Ps to practice, using the given words. After 5’, getting feedback (Ps role plays) Teacher remarks and gives marks Post-speaking: Asking Ps to make a conversation to talk about their own situations. Teacher: What do Vietnamese children 10’ wish? students s : answer Pre-teaching new words Teacher: models Students repeat.. Students’ activities Can you clean the board for me please? Of course / Ok / Yes, please.. Students practice in pairs to read the dialogue. Getting feedback * Asking for favor : Can / could you help me? Could you do me a favor? Can / could you ...? * Respond to favors : Yes, certainly / Of course / Sure No problem. What can I do for you? How can I help you? I’m sorry. I’m really busy. * Offering assistance : May I help you? Let me help you? * Responding to assistance: Yes / No, thanks / No, thank you. That’s very kind of you..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span> Language focus 3 Ask ss to use the expression in the box to fill the dialogues. Students can talk about anything besides the given cues. Receptionist: ……………………………? Tourist : yes. Can you ……………..? Receptionist: Sure. Turn right when you get out of the hotel. Turn left at the first corner. ………... your right Tourist :…………………… Ss do ex. IV Consolidations: 2’ - Retell the main points of this lesson. V Homework : 2’ 1. Learn by heart the expressions to offer assistance and favor and how to respond them. 2. Write the dialogue between you and a tourist who lost money. - Prepare for next lesson.. Date of preparing: 13/11/11 Date of teaching : 15/11/11. Unit 6: the younger pioneers club. listen _L f1. Period 36 Class :8a2-6 AThe aims and objectives : 1- The aims - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete a song for details 2- Objectivies a-Language contents: Structures: Using modal verbs. present simple tense. b- skill: listening and speaking B-Preparations : 1-teacher :book ,lesson plan ,poster ,radio 2- students :book ,notebook C-procedures : I. Organization 2’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span> -Greeting - who’s absent today ? II. checking up the previous lesson +warm up :3’ Listen to a song - Let Ss listen to the song for fun III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to Ss . *Pre – teach vocabulary - to unite = doan ket , - peace (n) > < war (n) - (to) shout out (st) : noi to (action) - hold hand (v) : nam tay. (action) - … From place to place …: tu noi nay den noi khac… + Land: (revision) + World: (revision) + South: (revision) + North: (revision) * Guess the missing words - Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the song - Get them to share with their partners and report their predictions .Then write them on the board . While - listening : - Turn on the tape 3 times and ask Ss to check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to read their results - Give feedback Children of our land unite Let,s sing for peace , Let,s sing for right . Let,s sing for the love between north and south , Oh, children of our land , unite . Children of the world hold hands . Let,s show our love from place to place . Let,s shout out loud , Let,s make a stand , Oh , children of the world , hold hands . -Turn on the tape once more to check the results again . Post - listening : - Ask Ss to work in groups to learn how to sing the song. Students’ activities 7’ Listen to a song. Listen and copy down Work in groups to guess the missing words in the song . Report their predictions.. 5’ Listen to the tape and check their predictions Read their answers . 15. Listen and check the results again .. Learn how to sing. \ Listen and copy . Work in groups of four. - Some Ss of each group to sing a.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span> + Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally . - Call on some Ss from each groups to sing a song. 10 Language focus 1 -ask ss to work with parner to ask and answer the questions. song. - Copy down new Grammar Structure . -Work individually. Give example.. - Look at the table and talk about their friends’ hobbies. - Work in pairs . - Copy the table in to the notebook. -Then ask and answer the questions with your partner .. 4 Consolidation:1’ - Retell the main points of this lesson. 5 Homework : 2’ 1. Copy down the completed song . 2. Prepare the next lesson. Date of preparing: 14/11 /11 Date of teaching : 16/11/11. Unit 6: the younger pioneers club. read. Period 37 Class :8a2-6 AThe aims and objectives : 1- The aims By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand about the youth union in Vietnam 2- Objectivies a-Language contents: Structures: reading bout the young pioneers club b-skill: reading , speaking B-Preparations : 1-teacher :book ,lesson plan ,poster ,radio 2- students :book ,notebook.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span> C-procedures : I. Organization: 2’ -Greeting - who’s absent today ? II. checking up the previous lesson +warm up :5’ - Call ss to sing a song “children of our land -do lf 1 * Warm up : 5’ Chatting 1-what social activities does the youth union in Vietnam often do? 2-do you know any social activities these organization carry ? III. new lesson :. Teacher’s activities T *Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the 10’ reading passage and some new words to Ss . 1. Pre – teach vocabulary : T elicits the vocab : - Citizenship (n) = quyen cong dan -- Voluntary (a) = tu nguyen . - fitness(n) t×nh tr¹ng søc khoÎ -awareness(n): cã ý thøc -personality (n) nh©n c¸ch -Social (a) thuéc vÒ x· héi Rub out and remember -T asks ss to guess the words to fill in the missing : 1-the youth union was founded in ……… 2-in …….the youth union was officially named as it is today 3- the youth union’s activities aim to help the young develop ………………….. 4-its aims and principles have been …… for the young Vietnamese people of today and tomorrow. Students’ activities Listen and copy . - Work individually. - Copy down new lesson.. Repeat chorally , individually . Play game. Ss predict the word to fill the missing. *While - reading :. Ask ss to read the text and check the 10’ prediction Read the text and check Get feedback a-1931 b. December 1976 c-their public awareness and form their personality d-the guidelines Asks ss to read again the text and answer Read again and answer the question the question (in groups) Asks ss to answer the question by playing.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span> game lucky number Gets feedback a-Any Vietnamese youth from 15 to 30 years of age can join the youth union b-the young union was founded on March 26 1976 c-the complete name of the youth union is Ho Chi Minh city communist youth union d-some social activities of the youth union are helping and handicapped ,cleaning the environment ,green summer volunteers campaign …. e- these activities aim to help the young develop their public awareness and form their personality *Post - reading : 8’ Interview a member of the young Vietnamese - Call on an excellent student in class to practice with the teacher . - Ask Ss to work in closed pairs. Work in open pairs - Interview a member of the young Vietnamese -Listen and copy - Work in group of 3 or four. IV Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson .3’ V. Homework : 2’ 1. Learn by heart new words and write the summary of the young Vietnamese 2. Prepare the next lesson. Date of preparing: 16/11 /11 Date of teaching : 27/11/11. Unit 6: the younger pioneers club. write. Period 38 Class :8a2-6 AThe aims and objectives : 1- The aims Help ss write Hoa’s letter to her parents telling what she is going to do. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a letter about a future plan using be going to 2- Objectivies a-Language contents Structures: to be going to b-skill: reading , writing B-Preparations : 1-teacher :book ,lesson plan ,poster ,.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span> 2- students :book ,notebook ,poster C-procedures : I. Organization: 2’ -Greeting /- who’s absent today ? II. checking up the previous lesson +warm up :5’ - Call ss to write new words by heart * Warm up : 5’ Revision of the structure Be going to - Ask Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a future plan . Get Ss to make the sentence : “ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin with a letter from A to Z : III. new lesson :. Teacher’s activities T A-Pre - writing: Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss: today we’ll write a letter. 10 1.Pre – teach vocabulary : - to raise fund: ( translation ) - a bank; ( visual ) - Natural resources: coal oil, iron . 2. Reading the notice - Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y members of the school” - Ask some questions to check their understanding a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in the recycling program? b. What is the purpose of the recycling program? c. What other programs can members of the Y and Y participate in? - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions. - Give feedback and ask them to practice in open pairs. 3. Complete the letter - Ask some questions to set the scene : - Who writes the letter? ( Nga ) - To whom does Nga write? ( Linh ) - Is Nga a member of Y and Y? ( Yes ) - What does Nga write to Linh about? ( She writes about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is going to participate ) - Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the letter. - Give feedback - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and correct mistakes if any. 4. Reading the dialogue : Set the scene “Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y and Y Green Group, about the activities that she is going to do .” 13. Ss ’activities - Listen and copy. - Listen and repeat chorally and individually - Copy down - Read the notice and answer the questions. - Practice asking and answering the questions in pairs - Listen and answer ( the whole ) - Work in pairs to complete the letter. - Read the complete letter. Key: 1- community 2- recycling 3- collect 4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn 8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping - Listen and copy..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span> - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her ’ aunt. B - While - writing : - Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents. - Get Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter on - Work in groups to write poster Move around the class and help them if they the letter are necessary . C - Post - writing : - Choose four letters from 4 groups and stick them on 8’ - Stick their letters on the the board. Get the whole class to read the 4 letters board and correct its and correct them. mistakes - Give feedback : * Suggested letter Dear Mom and Dad , I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in - Read the suggested letter the Y & Y Green Group of my school. aloud The green Group is holding an environment month plan. We are going to clean the lakes, banks on weekends. We are also going to plant trees and flowers in the parks and water them every afternoon after class. We are planting young trees and plants to sell to other schools. I hope that we can bring more - Write a letter. green to the city and earn some money for the school Y&Y. The program is very interesting and useful, is - Listen and copy. not it? I am still in a very good health. I will tell you more about the group activities later. With love , Hoa. 4. Consolidation:3’ - Ask ss to retell what they’ve learnt. 5. Home works:2’ - Ask each student to help Hoa write a letter to her parents in their notebooks. - Learn by heart new words. - Prepare for the next period: Revision. Date of preparing: 1711/12 Date of teaching : 19/11/12. revision. Period 39 Class :8a1-5 AThe aims and objectives : 1- The aims By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit 4 to unit 6 2- Objectivies a-Language contents: Structures grammar from unit 3 to unit 6 b-skill: four skills B-Preparations : 1-teacher :book ,lesson plan ,poster ,.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span> 2- students :book ,notebook ,poster C-procedures : I. Organization: 2’ -Greeting - who’s absent today ? II. checking up the previous lesson +warm up :5’ - Call ss to write new words by heart -do lf 1 * Warm up : III. new lesson :. Teacher’s activities A –revision Ask ss to retell grammar from u4 to u6 Gets feedback Unit 4 : Preposition of time Used to + inf Unit 5 : Adverbs of manner Cach thành lập: Adj + ly Adverbs of manner (Tinh từ + ly Ex: happy + ly happily He smiled happily. Note : Một số trạng từ không theo quy tắc trên: Động từ SHOULD +Vo Reported speech 1. Asked / told + someone + to-inf bảo ai đã làm . Ex : He said to her "Can help me, please? " He asked her to help him. 2. Thuật lại một lời khuyªn SHOULD : Ex : He said to her "You should work harder" He said she should work harder. Unit 6 : Gerunds (danh động từ) v-ing Ex: Study studying : việc học, chuyện học hành - Danh động từ đứng sau một số động từ như: like, love, hate, enjoy, stop Ex : We like playing soccer but we hate skipping. Lời đề nghị với MAY, CAN, COULD và c¸ch đ¸p lại Some other structures: Simple present tense: Simple past : Present progressive tense Near future: be going to + V-inf Adj + Enough + to-inf Used to + inf Reported speech. T. Students’ activities. 15’ Ss retell the grammar Listen and copy.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span> Enough + Noun Preposition of time: at / on / in / between …and … B practice ask ss to exercise Do exercise Rewrite these sentences as directed Rewrite these sentences 1. “ Please lend me my book , Lan , “ said Hoa . as directed = > Hoa asked ………… 2. " Please open your book" Nam said to Hoa. 20’ 1-Hoa ask Hoa to lend Nam asked her her book 3. “ You should practice speaking English every day , “ 2-Nam asked Hoa to => The teacher said we ….. open her book 4. “ Could you help me ? “ Mrs Jackson said to Mary . ……………… => Mrs Jackson ………….. Complete the dialogue A : ……………………….. , please ? B : Sure . What can I do you for you ? Complete the dialogue A : ……….carry the suitcase for me ? It is heavy . B : Certainly . I will help you . a-Can you help me A : Thank you very much a-can you Do exercises in workbook. IV. Consolidation:3’ - Ask ss to retell what they’ve learnt. V. Home works:2’ - Learn by heart grammar and new word from u4 to u6 . - Prepare for test . Date of preparing: 20/11/12 Date of teaching : 22/11/12. the second of the written test. Period 40 Class :8a1-5 AThe aims Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 4 to unit 6 so that they can supplement what they are short of . B. contents I - Choose the best answer 1. He used to....................................football when he was a kid A.plays B. playing C. play D. played 2. Can you help me....................................my bag ? A. to carry B. carry C. carrying D. carried 3. The teacher asked me..................you this dictionary . A. give B. to give C. giving D. gave 4. What can I do.........................you ? asked Lan . A. of B. to C. from D. for II. Finish the second sentence so that it has the same meaning as the first 1. "Can you meet me next week ?" Lan said to Hao ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span> - Lan asked Hoa........................................................................ 2. When I was a child, I lived in the countryside - When I was a child, I used....................................................... 3. "Please turn off the radio" grandmother said to Hoa. - Grandmother asked Hoa................................................... 4. - " You should learn the lesson by heart" my teacher told us . - My teacher said (that) we should............................................. III. fill in each gap with a suitable preposition (®iÒn giíi tõ phï hîp )(at,in,on ) 1. We are waiting ……..the bus stop . 2. we meet you……7 o’clock 3. the meeting will begin ……..July 4.I always listen to music ……Monday IV - Read the following passage and answer truth(T) or false(F) . My son is a secondary school student. He goes to school five days a week and studies many subjects at school. Last week, I went to school and met his teacher at school. His teacher gave me his report card. I was shocked to know that he worked excellently on Math, English, Physics, Chemistry but he had poor results with the other subjects such as Geography, History. I found out that he is clever but lazy. He doesn't like to learn his lesson by heart. His final result was only satisfactory. I came home and told him about his result. He only smiled and said that he could do with Geography and History. Oh, what can I do ? 1-He goes to school six days a week …………………….. 2-His teacher gave me his report card ……………….. 3-He was shocked to know that he worked excellently on Math, History ……………… 4-He is lazy and clever ………………………… 5-He likes to learn his lesson by heart …………….. 6-He only cried and said that he could do with math and history ……………………… V-complete the sentence 1-I/usually /go to school/ 6 o’clock 2-she/watch/TV at the moment C-homework ask ss to prepare new lesson.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span> Date of preparing:20 /11 /12 Date of teaching:23 /11 12. Period 41. UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD. Getting started +Listen and read+ lf1,2,3. Class8a1-5 A. The aims and requests. 1. the aims By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about their neighborhood or give information about their neighborhood. By the end of the lesson. Ss will be able to know more about Na,s new neighbor 2. objectives a. language focus : present perfect tense. Too + adj + to-inf b. skills : Listening, speaking, reading and writing. B. Preparation +T: Textbook , cassette , poster , chalk, CD + Ss: textbook, notebook, pen… C. procedures I. organization.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span> Greeting Who’s absent today ? II. checking up the old lesson +Warm up Getting started - Ask Ss to match the names of places with the suitable pictures - Ask for their meanings to make sure Ss know exactly what they mean * Answers : a. grocery store b. stadium c. wet market d. drug store ’ e. hairdresser s f. swimming pool III. new lesson Teacher's activities T Students' activities I * Presentation : 10’ I. Presentation , - Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam s Listen and read neighborhood . They are talking to each Dialogue page 63, 64 other .” Vocabulary - Give Ss an open dialogue between A pancake Nam and Na , then ask them to complete To serve it Ex : I’m serving a glass of water Na : How long ….. you … in this *Checking vocabulary neighborhood ? Rub out and Remember Nam : I ... here …..10 years . *Questions Na : Really . It is a long time . III. Practice * Answers : have – lived / have – 1. Practice the dialogue with a lived – for partner. - Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask 2. Complete the sentences. Use the them to practice in pairs . words from the dialogue => Form : have / has + past participle Answer key * Use : to talk about something which a) new started in the past and continues up to b) last week the present c) tired We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ d) restaurant with the Present Perfect Tense : For + e) Hue length of time f) pancakes Since + starting point Listen and copy the grammar II exercise 20’ Repeat chorally , individually , then - Ask Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and copy decide which is the length of time and which is starting point . ss listen and copy the sentence - Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since ss do ex 2 or For - Read out a phrase , and Ss to add - Go on until Ss can remember how to Since or For use For/Since - Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span> - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss to make full sentences . - Correct their pronunciation Example : I / live / here / last week I have lived here since last week. Ask Ss to complete the conversations - Have them work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback. 2/ Complete the sentences, using for / since for five minutes since January since 1990 since the summer for 3 hours for 10 weeks since Friday for 20 years Ps take turn to write and correct 3/ Complete the sentences, using the present perfect: b) We have not eaten c) I have not seen d) have attended e) has worked f) has collected Ps work in pairs to complete the dialogue. IVConsolidation ( 2’ ): T sums up the main content of the lesson. V-homework - learn new words by heart. - do exercises.. Date of planning :25/11/12 Date of teaching :27/11/12 Period 42.. Unit 7 : ( cont ) Lesson 2 : Speak +lf4. A-Aim and objectives 1- Aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to ask and answer about sending mail. - Develop speaking skill. * Teaching points:- ask and answer about sending mail. 2- objectives. - Language content + Grammar Present perfect with for and since + Vocabulary parcel, air mail, surface - Techniques Matching, Rub out and remember. B - Teaching aid. - T: posters, pictures - Sts: homework..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span> C .Produces 1. Organization ( 1’ ). - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts.. 2. Checking up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * Warm up : + Chatting - Show a letter and ask Ss some questions + What is this ? + Where can I post it to my friend ? + How can I post it ? + How much ? + Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ? + Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ? Lead in the new lesson . 3. New lesson. Teacher’s activities T Students’activites * Presentation : Listen and repeat chorally , + Pre- teach vocabulary : individually - air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air Copy down - surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus ( whole class ) - Parcel ( n) buu pham buu kien. Play game - charge (v / n ) : le phi, cuoc phi. * Checking : Rub out and remember Listen carefully . + Reading comprehension - Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to Work in pairs Qui Nhon , so she has to go to the post office .” - Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in Read the dialogue to fine out pairs to compare their answers . the answers . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the Practice asking and answering answers the questions . a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface * Answers : mail ? Why ? a. Mrs Kim send the parcel b. What is the weight of her parcel ? surface mail because it is much c. How much does she pay ? cheaper . - Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions b. Her parcel is five kilograms . ** Practice : c. She pays 19, 200 dongs . - Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim and Practice the dialogue with practice the dialogue with teacher ( clerk ) teacher . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . Correct their pronunciation Work in open pairs - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue . Work in closed pairs . * Further practice : - Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue + Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail Practice the dialogues , using - Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the the situations . clerk in the post office . ( whole class ).
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span> - Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue themselves . Work in pairs Expected dialogue Clerk : Can I help you ? Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontom . Clerk :Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? Work in groups Mrs Lan : I send it airmail . How much is it ? Clerk : Let me see . Mmm , 15 grams , it is Work in open pairs only 1,200 dongs . Mrs Lan : Here you are . Work in closed pairs Clerk : Thank you . 4/ Complete the dialogue - Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs (1) have been (5) want - Give Ss some situations : (2) hope (6) looks 2. Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g (3) have …lived (7) have 3. Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / 2 kg …been 4. Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / 5 kgs . (4) Is (8) see *language focus 4 - Get Ss to work in pairs , practicing three dialogues and move around class to help Ss . Ask Ss to complete the conversations - Have them work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson. * Homework : 1. Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson . Date of planning :27/11/12 Unit 7 : ( cont ) Date of teaching :29/11/12 Period 43. Listen+ Language focus 5 I-Aim and objectives. 1- Aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to listen to the conversation about plan for the weekend. - Develop listening skill. * Teaching points : listen to the conversation about plan for the weekend. 2- objectives. - Language content + Grammar Present perfect with for and since - Techniques Word square, True / false statements. B- Teaching aid. - T: posters, pictures - Sts: homework. C .Produces.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span> 1. Organization ( 1’ ). - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts.. 2. Checking up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * Warm up : Brainstorming and guessing - Ask Ss to look at 4 advertisements of “ what is on this week ? “ and get Ss to guess what is in the bank 2-3-4 3. New lesson. Teacher’s activities A- Pre - listening : New words Elicits the vocab Advertisement (n) mẫu quãng cáo English Speaking contest (n) cuộc thi nói Tiếng Anh culture house (n) nhà văn hoá sound exciting : Nghe thật thú vị sound + adj B- While - listening : + Listening task : - Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers - Give feedback a. The new comer b. Town Ground c. English speaking contest d . Culture House Listening task 2 : - Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66 - Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false which has no information - Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends . - Give feedback - Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick in the correct boxes : True ? False or No information Statements T F No a. Na does not know the b X neighborhood very well b. Na does not like movies X c. Na will go to the photo exhibition this weekend X d. Na will not go to the X English speaking Contest e. Na will go to the soccer X match with Nam X f. Nam is a soccer fan . + Comprehension questions - Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding of the conversation . C- Post - Listening :. T. Ss’activities Read after teacher - Listen and copy. - Work individually. - Work individually. - Work in pairs - Listen to the conversation again and tick in the corrects boxes. - Practice asking and answering the questions. ( whole class ).
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span> - Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends about what Na is going to do this weekend . - Call on some volunteers from each group to tell the whole class about Na . *Language focus 5 : Game : Pelmanism differen cheap expensiv long same - Work in group . t e Talk about What Na is modern short big small going to do this - Show Ss 3 books , a red book and a yellow one which weekend. have the same size and a bigger brown dictionary then - Do Language focus 5 ask Ss to make comparisons by playing a game Example : - Work in pairs - The red book is the same as the yellow one - Listen and repeat - The red book is as big as the yellow one chorally , individually - The yellow book is different from the brown dictionary - The yellow is not as big as the brown dictionary . => Form : The same as … ( not ) as … as / different from Listen and copy - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 5 / 70 - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback a. not as big as b. different from c. different from d. the same as e. not as big as f. the same as g. as long as h. not as modern as i. not as cheap as IV Consolidation: - Retell the main points of the lesson:. V. Homework : 1. Write a short passage about what Na is going to do . Date of planning 28/11/12 Date of teaching: 3/11/12 Period 44. Correcting the test 45’ A- the aims - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to find out their mistakes and correct them. - Consolidate Sts’ grammar. - Develop 4 skills. * Teaching points : Correcting the test. B- CONTENTS 1-answer keys question 1 a _C B_b c-b d-d question 2 1-lan asked hoa to meet her next week 2-when i was children ,I used to live in the country house 3-grandmother asked hoa to turn off the radio 4-my teacher said we should learn the lesson by heart question 3 1-at 2-at 3-in 4-on.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span> question 4 1-f 2-t 3-f 4- f 5-f 6- f question 5 1-I usually go to school at 6 o’clock 2-she is watching TV at the moment 2-result mark 9-10 : mark 7-8 ; mark 5-6 ; mark 3-4 ; mark 0-2 : 3- draw experiences teacher makes a list of comment mistakes that students have made that helps them solve those mistakes - tense _position time date month _indirect 4-homework -rewrite the test in the notebook prepare new lesson.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span> Date of planning 2/12/12 Unit 7: My neighborhood Date of teaching: 4/12/12 Class 8a1-5 Lesson 4 – Read Period 45 A-Aim and objectives. 1- the Aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read and understand the content of the text. - Develop reading skill. * Teaching points:- reading a text about a shopping mall. 2- objectives. - Language content + Grammar Present perfect with for and since + Vocabulary shopping mall, special discounts, wider selection of products, residents, roof, convenient, comfort - skill - Techniques Rub out and Remember, True / False statements..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span> B- Teaching aid. C-.Produces I. Organization ( 1’ ). - T: posters, pictures - Sts: homework.. - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up +Warm up (5’) *Warm up : Guessing the words - Give Ss the definitions and get Ss to find out the words as quickly as possible. 1. A place where you can buy everything 2. A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit. 3. A place where you can buy books. 4. A place where you can come to eat. 5. A place where you can come to see the movies. 6. A person who comes to the store and buys something. => Lead in the new lesson III. New lesson Teacher’s activities T Ss’activities A - Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage 10’ reading and some new words to Ss : * Pre – teach vocabulary : - Listen and copy - a roof: mai nha ( picture ) - convenient = thuan loi (translation) - a selection: su lua chon . - available = san co de dung , co the de dung - Listen and repeat - a mall = many stores , restaurants , even movies chorally , individually theaters are under one roof: khu thuong mai (explanation) . - a resident = cu dan (example) * Checking vocabulary : What and where - Listen and do the task Ask ss to guess the statement true or false Statements True False 1. A mall is open six days a week. v 2. There are more than 50 stores in v the mall . 3. Everyone in the neighborhood is v pleased about the new mall . 4. It will be more comfortable to shop in the mall than in the present t shopping area . 5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu t Street may have to close. 20 - Read them aloud and copy. B-While - reading - Work individually - Ask Ss to read the text silently and compare their or get more information . - Ss look at the * True / False statements statements in the box - Have Ss look at the statements in the box and get them and get them to read to read the text again and decide which statements are.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span> true, which are false . - Have Ss correct the false statements 1. The mall is open daily 2. There are 50 stores in the mall. 3. Not everyone is pleased. The owner of the small stores on Tran Phu Street are not happy. * Comprehension questions : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in the exercise 2/ 68( Play a game : Lucky flower ) C- Post - reading : - Give a situation and ask Ss to discuss it “ Do you want to have a new mall in your neighborhood ? If there is one, what will happen to the residents ?” - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class. ok, pen.. 5’. the text again and decide which statements are true , which are false . - Work in pairs - Ss correct the false statements - One by one - Play a game in two teams. - Ss to answer the questions in the exercise 2( 68) - Work in pairs. VI. Consolidation:2’ - Retell the content of the passage. V.Homework : 3’ - Copy their ideas about there is a mall in their neighborhood. - Do exercises in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: Date of planning 4/12/12 Unit 7: My neighborhood Date of teaching: 7/12/12 Class 8a1-5 write Period 46 A-Aim and objectives. 1-the Aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to write a notice. - Develop writing skill. * Teaching points: writing a notice. 2- objectives - Language content + Grammar The present perfect tense + Vocabulary effect, hardware - skill Pairs work, groups work . B- preparation . - T: posters, pictures - Sts:homework. C .Produce I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span> - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * warm up *Warm up : * Chatting 1. Have you ever written a notice ? 2. To whom ? 3. What for ? 4. What type ? => Lead in the new lesson . III. New lesson T Teacher’s activities A- Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and 12 the scene “ The residents and store owners on Tran Phu ’ Street are going to hold a meeting to discuss the effects of the new mall” * Pre- teach vocabulary : - effects (n) :tac động , tác dụng(translation) - contact (v) : liên lac (explanation) - hardware store:dung cu cong dung trong nha (translation) * Guiding questions a. Why are the residents and store owners on Tran Phu street going to hold a meeting ? b. When will they hold a meeting ? What time ? c. Where will they hold the meeting ? - Get Ss to read the notice and answer some questions to check their understanding. - Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the questions . - Give feedback a. To discuss the effects of the new mall b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 p.m c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao Street , Binh ,s hardware store . - Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full sentences . B- While -writing : - Get Ss to write the notice individually 15 - Ask Ss to share with their partners ’ - Check some notices and correct them - Write the model notice on the board Suggested answers : The school English Speaking club Holding A Speaking Contest to celebrate teacher,s day Date : November 15. Ss’activities - Play game ( whole class). - Listen and copy . - Repeat in chorus.. - Work in pairs - Read individually - Practice asking and answering the questions. - Ss to read the passage and ask some questions to check their understanding , get them to use short answers . - Work in pairs - Practice asking and answering the questions. - Work individually - Read the correct.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span> Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm notice Place : Hall 204 , Building G Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at - Ss to write one notice the above address for more information. about their class C-Post - writing : meeting. - Ask Ss to write one notice about their class meeting - Get them to work in group - Work in group - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class. 8’ - Give feedback. IV. Consolidation 2’: - Retell the main points of this lesson: the way to write a notice. V. Homework 2’: 1. Write the completed notice in their notebooks . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare for the next period:. date of preparing :11/12 date of teaching :13/12 UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD PERIOD: 47 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2,3,4 class :8a1-5 A Objectives and aim : 1-the aim By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to review the present perfect tense with the adverb since and for. 2- objective 1- Structure: the present perfect tense 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * warm up *Warm up : 5’ Matching.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span> - Stick a poster of infinitives and Past Participles on the board. - Divide the class into 2 teams - Get Ss form 2 teams to go to the board and write each pair of infinitive – past participle be see collected go worked lived do seen eat attended write been written eaten work attend done live collect gone Answers : be – been ; write – written ; go – gone live – lived ; see – seen ; collect – collected do – done attend – attended ;eat – eaten work – worked III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I * Presentation : 10’ - Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam ,s Listen and copy the grammar neighborhood . They are talking to each other .” Repeat chorally , individually , - Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na , then copy then ask them to complete it Na : How long ….. you … in this neighborhood ? Nam : I ... here …..10 years . Na : Really . It is a long time . * Answers : have – lived / have – lived – for - Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask them to practice in pairs . => Form : have / has + past participle * Use : to talk about something which started in the past and continues up to the present We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ with the Present Perfect Tense : For + length of time Since + starting point II exercise 20’ - Ask Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which is the length of time and which is starting point . - Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For - Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since. - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss to. ss listen and copy the sentence ss do ex 2 - Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For - Go on until Ss can remember how to use For/Since 2/ Complete the sentences, using for / since for five minutes since January since 1990 since the summer.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span> make full sentences . - Correct their pronunciation Example : I / live / here / last week I have lived here since last week. Ask Ss to complete the conversations - Have them work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . - Give feedback. for 3 hours for 10 weeks since Friday for 20 years Ps take turn to write and correct 3/ Complete the sentences, using the present perfect: b) We have not eaten c) I have not seen d) have attended e) has worked f) has collected Ps work in pairs to complete the dialogue 4/ Complete the dialogue (1) have been (5) want (2) hope (6) looks (3) have …lived (7) have … been (4) Is (8) see. VIConsolidation:3’ -Retell the main points. V Homework :2’ 1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks . 2. Prepare the next lesson Date of planning 8/12/12 . Unit 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Date of teaching :10/12/12 Period 47 Lesson 1 : Getting started, listen and read + L.F 4 class : a8 1-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand the content of the text and some new structure. - Develop 4 skills. 2- objective 1- Structure: :- Present Continuous tense 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * Warm up.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span> - Do you live in the city / country? - Have you ever been to the country / city? - When did you go? III. new lesson Teacher’s activities T * Pre -reading : Introduce the topic of 10’ the passage reading and some new words *. Pre – teach vocabulary : - a relative = uncles , aunts cousins - peaceful = quiet and calm (a) - permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time - accessible = co the den gan duoc -medical facilities = cac phuong tien y te * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember * Brainstorming ( Getting started ) - Get Ss to talk about city life and country life . The words in the box of getting started may help you . country life. city life. ** While – reading : *. True / false statements Statements True False 1. Na lives in the city x 2. Na went to a village x which has some relatives lives there . x 3. The village is very peaceful and quiet x 4. Hoa prefers the city life - Turn on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to predict the true / false statements . - Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write them on the board. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and compare their ideas - Give feedback and get more information - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue *. Comprehension questions :. Students’ activities Listen and copy. Listen and repeat chorally Copy down Play game Ss to talk about city life and country life.. - Play agame in two teams. Possible answers : - tall buildings beautiful views - plenty kinds of goods food - polluted air air 10' - traffic jams friendly - entertainment peaceful busy. - fresh - fresh -. Work in groups Read the dialogue , compare their ideas Practice the dialogue in pairs Work in pairs - some pairs to practice asking answering the questions in front of class . Practice asking and answering the questions.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span> - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the a. Na has been to Kin Lien village questions in b. She was there for the weekend ex 2 / 73 c. to her , the countryside is peaceful - Call on some pairs to practice asking and quiet and there is nothing to do . answering the questions in front of class . d. There is no libraries , no movies , - Give feedback no supermarket , no zoos … - Ask Ss to work in closed pairs e. Country life is becoming better . **/ Post - reading : Many remote area are getting * L.F 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make electricity . People can now have comparisons between the city and the 10’ things like refrigerators and TV , country . medical facilities are more Ex : The air in the country is fresher than accessible . in the city - Let each Student read aloud one of the - Ss work in pairs to make sentences they have made. comparisons between the city and the - Give feedback country. - Each Student read aloud one of the sentences they have mad. IV Consolidation: 3’ Retell the main points . V Homework :2’ - Learn by heart new words and copy two lines for each word . – Copy the answers in their notebooks . - Prepare the next Date of planning :9/12/12 . Unit 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Date of teaching :11/12/12 Lesson 2: speak +Lf3,5 Period 48 class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to talk about the changes of the town and the place where they live. 2- objective 1- Structure: :- The present progressive tense To show changes with get and become 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * Warm up 5’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span> - Do you live in the city / country? - Have you ever been to the country / city? - When did you go? III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities pre - speaking Setting the scene “ Hoa,s grand father is 78 “ - Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger than she is now . - Ask Ss to make a sentence about her health => Hoa,s grand father is getting weaker + Form : am / is / are + V-ing + Use : used to describe changes with get and become **While – speaking : - Ask Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk to their partners about the changes of the town . The words in the box under the pictures may help you - Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss can speak easily - traffic - > busy - sky -> cloudy - houses -> high - city -> beautiful - trees - > green - Get Ss to work in pairs * Post - speaking : *Language focus 3. Teacher asks some students read aloud the answer -Teacher explains exercise 3 and asks do ex 3 * L.F 5-p.79: Comparative and superlative adjectives - Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives * Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object More long adj + than + object * Superlative : The + short adjective - est. t 7’. Students’ activities. Listen and copy. Work in pairs 8’ - Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk to their partners about the changes of the town Ss to work in pairs * Possible answers : - The traffic is getting busier . - There are more tall buildings and houses - The houses are getting more modern - The town is becoming more beautiful . - The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier 15’ -Students do it -Students work in pairs *Language focus 3 Answer key b)...........are getting weak c)...........is getting dark d)...........is becoming cold e)...........are getting better f)............is becoming cleaner. - Ss retell the main structure grammar about the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives - Ss make comparisons the house, the villa and the apartment. - Each Student read aloud one of the.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span> The most + long adjective sentences they have made. * Irregular adjectives good/ well – better – the best *Language focus . bad – worse – the Answer key worst The house is more expensive than the many – more – the apartment. most The villa is the most expensive little – less – the least The hose is smaller the villa - Ex: The house is more expensive The apartment is the smallest. than the apartment. The apartment is smaller than the villa. The villa is the oldest home. - Ask ss to make the new sentences to compare the apartment, the villa and the house. IV-Consolidation:3’ Retell the main points of this lesson. V-Homework : 2’ Write some sentences , using Present Progressive Tense to describe changes in their school Date of planning :10/12/12. Unit 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Date of teaching :13/12/12 Lesson 3:listen +Lf 1,2 Period 49 class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim -.- By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice in listening for details, revision how to make a phone call and do ex1,2 - Develop listening skill. 2- objective 1- Structure: :- The present progressive tense 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster ,tape ,radio students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * Warm up 5, -: * Matching - Prepare eight cards with phrases on them - Write eight verbs on the board ( play , do , watch , go , clean , have , phone , speak ).
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span> - Divide the class into 2 teams - Hand out each team 8 cards - Ask Ss to stick the cards with phrases besides the suitable verbs - The team which is faster is the winner III. new lesson. Teacher's and Students' activities I. Pre- listening -Teacher introduces the situation of the dialogue using the pictures Lan and Mrs. Hang -Teacher says: “This is Lan and Mrs. Hang. Lan is in Ha Noi; Aunt Hang is in Hue. Aunt Hang is telephoning Lan. Now guess What the are talking about.. II. While- Listening Listen page 74 -Teacher asks listen and fill in the missing words Teacher plays the tape. -Teacher plays the tape again. -Teacher plays the tape the last time. -Students and Teacher check the answers. -T gives the answer key. -Sts write them into the notebook. -Teacher asks Students repeat the dialogue. -Teacher plays the tape. -Students repeat. -Teacher asks Students to take role and read the dialogue. III. Post- speaking * Language focus 1 : Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as example S1:Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ? S2 : Is that good fortune ? S1 : That is right S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed S1 : Oh , no ! S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45 - Give them the shipping information and ask them to make similar dialogues ** Language focus 2 : Complete the dialogue Use the verbs in the present progressive tense .. T 5’. Content -Students guess and give the answers. 10’. -Students do as request. -Students listen and check. -Students give the answers. Students listen and fill in the blanks.. *Answer key. 15 ’. 1) That 6)coming 2) This 7) week 3) It’s 8) arriving 4) Where 9) Thursday 5) from 10) late -Students write them into the notebook -Students do as request. Ss to practice the dialogue as example Work in pairs. Ss do ex in pairs. then to go ti the board to rewrite on the board. 2/ Complete the dialogue a) ‘playing d) am listening b) are doing e) are cleaning c) am watching f) am having.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span> - Asks Ss do ex in pairs. then to go ti the board to rewrite on the board. IVConsolidation: 3’ - Retell the main points of this lesson. VHomework : 2’ 1. Do exercises in workbook . 2. Prepare the next lesson. Date of planning :16/12/12 . Unit 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Date of teaching :17/12/12 Lesson 3: read Period 50 Class :a 81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read and understand the content of the text 2- objective 1- Structure: 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. * Warm up 5’ How are you ? Do you want to live in the country or in the city ? Why ?/ Why not ? What problem may arise When so many people move to the city ?.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span> III.new lesson. Teacher’s activities T Ss’activities A- Pre- reading : 10’ * Pre - teach vocabulary : - rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside - Listen and copy down (exapmle) - urban ( adj ) > < rural: ngêi sèng ¬ thµnh phè - strain (n) =sù qu¸ t¶i (d©n sè) - typhoon (n) = storm (n):trËn bo· lín - drought (n) : nan han han (example0 -( to )struggle = dau tranh (explanation) - migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place to another especially in order to find work: dan di cu . - (to) increase = tang len , tang them , Gia tang (expl * Checking vocabulary : What and where Ask ss to guess the missing word in the summary 15 B-While - reading : - Let Ss read the text silently to check their Guess the missing word predictions . * Gap- filling : - Ss read the text silently to - Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary, check their predictions . using the information from the passage. - Work individually. - Call on some volunteers to report their results - Some Ss to read the text - Give feedback - Ss to work in pairs to 1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural 5. city 6. complete summary , using problems 7. schools 8. hospitals 9. problem the information from the 10 . world passage . - Call on some Ss to read the complete passage - Work in pairs aloud - Read their results . *Finding the words - Read the complete - Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their summary partners - Read the complete results. - Call them to report their results - Give feedback a. rural b. plentiful c. increase d. strain e. tragedy f. urban 5’ C-Post - reading : Discussion - Give a situation: If you were a Minister , what - Work in groups to discuss would you do for farmers ? - Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss - Show their ideas before * Suggested answers : class - build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside - build schools , hospitals - provide clean water , electricity , facilities - build factory ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span> - Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas before the class . IV Consolidation: 3’ - Retell the main points of this lesson: Many people to live in the city because they want to find new job, get more money, better facilities…. V.Homework : 2’ 1. Write 5 things that government should do for the rural areas . 2. Do exercises in workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson . + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster. + Ss: textbook, notebook, pen….. Date of planning :16/12/12. Unit 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Date of teaching :17/12/12 Lesson 4 ;write Period 51 class :a81-2 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to write a letter. - Develop writing skill 2- objective 1- Structure: writing a letter. 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. *Warm up : Revision 5’ - Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in the correct order . - Prepare 6 cards with 6 outlines on them . - Call 6 Ss to hold them and stand in a random order - Ask some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct order . - Write the answer on the board and ask Ss to copy . 1. Heading - Writer,s address / Date - Dear …… , 2. opening 3. Body 4. closing.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span> III . New lesson: T Teacher’s activities A-Pre- writing: 5 -Teacher asks Students work in individual arrange the exercise 1 page 76 -Teacher checks. b-While … writing: -Teacher asks Students work in pairs ask and 20 answer about the questions page 76 Students practice Students work in pairs - Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their neighborhood - Let them write individually. - Have them compare with their partners and correct if they can . * Suggested letter : ( Writer,s address) ( Date ) Dear ...., I live in ….. , a small town. My family has a large house with four rooms and a small garden. My sister and I share one bedroom. From the bedroom window, I can see a beautiful park with green trees, flowers and a pond. We do not live far from my school so I usually walk there. In my neighborhood, there is a swimming pool and a beautiful park. On the weekend, I often go swimming with my friends. Early in the morning, I always jog with my sister around the park. But the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the public library near my school. There I not only can study and read books but also watch video and learn how to use the computer. Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood ? Is there anything interesting in the place where you live? Write to me. I would like to say goodbye now.. Ss’activities - Work individually - Compare with their partners Write 1 *Answer key Heading Write’s address Date Opening Body of letter Closing Teacher asks some pairs practice before the class. - Ss to write letters to friends about their neighborhood - Works individually. - Exchange their writings to correct. - Listen and copy..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span> I am looking forwards to hearing from you soon. Love , ( Signature ) A- Post - writing : Correction - Choose some letters to correct before class and ask them to read them aloud.. 5. - Choose some letters to correct before class and ask them to read them aloud .. IV. Consolidation: 3 - Retell the main points of the letter: to write letters to friends about their neighborhood V. Homework : 2 1. Write their letters on their notebooks 2. Prepare the next lesson. + Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, textbook, poster, extra exercises. + Ss’ preparation : textbook, workbook, pen…. Date of planning :20/12/12 . Date of teaching :24 /12/12 revision Period 52 class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to review the main grammar they’ve learnt in the fist term. - Develop 4 skills. 2- objective 1- Structure: Present tense with future meaning Gerunds Modal: May, Can, Could reported speech 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 4’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. *Warm up : Revision III New lesson. Teacher's and Students' activities. T. Content.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span> 10’ -T reminds the grammar of the lesson -Sts observe -T uses questions and answers a, b, c page 60 to explain for Sts -T explains -Sts observe -T asks Sts remind the commands and request about modals -Sts remind. 25. I. Revision 1.Present tense to talk about future activities 2.Gerunds- V_ing Use: To love Like doing Hate To enjoin doing Preposition + V_ing 3. Modal: May, Can, Could 4. . To report a command or request : (+) S + asked /told + O + to-inf… ( -) S +asked / told / requested /commanded + not + to-inf... 2.To report advice : * S + said + should / ought to / had better + V + O …. + shouldn’t/ oughtn’t to/ had better not + V + O… + advised+ O + (not) + to-inf + O …. -Then T asks ss to exercise L.F 3 ,4 (p.53) III, Exercise: 1, Put the verbs in correct form. a, Did Nam use to (play) soccer ?. - - Asks Ss to do exercises - Calls Ss to write the correct form of the verbs on the board - T corrects mistakes. -. Guides Ss how to do this exercise - Asks Ss to work in silence (2’) - Ss give the answers and explain - corrects mistakes. b, Yesterday, I (ride) my bike to school c, Do you enjoy (work) at night ? d, We (be) here since last week d, How long you (know) Miss Thu ? I (know) her for five years . E, You (see) Nam at the party yesterday? No. I (not see) him for some days 2, Choose the correct words a) He’ll come here … (on, in at) May 5th b) She made this dress … (herself, himself, myself) c) You must … (learn, to learn, learning) harder d) We have lived here … ( for, since, in) 1980 My Mom told me … (buy, to buy,.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span> buying) some food. IV Consolidation:3’ - Retell the main points of some Structure grammar. V Homework :1’ 1/Redo all the exercises and copy down 2/ Prepare the next lesson. Date of planning :24/12/12. Date of teaching :25 /12/12 revision Period 53 class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to review the main grammar they’ve learnt in the fist term. - Develop 4 skills. 2- objective 1- Structure: + enough + toV + reported speech + comparison 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. *Warm up : Revision 5’ III New lesson Teacher’s &student’ activities Content t 1, Presentation(10’) Reported speech 10’ + Commands, requests in reported.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span> Ss retell the structures of the reported speech and make some sentences. speech: to-V …... S + ask/ tell + O +. + Advices in reported speech: S1+ say + S2 + should + V….. S1+ advice + O + to-V…… Ex: “ You should change the way to learn English” 2, Practice Asks Ss to do exercise Work in pairs (2’) Some Ss write n the board Corrects mistakes. Ba said Lan should change the …. Exercise: Change these sentences into reported speech a, “ Can you lend me your history book ” b, “ You should study harder ”. Repeat the structures of the comparison and make sentences. c, “ Please give this letter to your Mom” d, “ You ought to tidy your room” 2, Comparison of adj a, Equality : S1+ be(not) + as + adj + as + S2 Ex:Your shirt is(not) as new as my shirt b,Similarity + different from > < the same as:. compare the differences between the equality and comparative. Ex:Trung is different from his mother S1 + be + different from + S2 a. be not the same as c, Comparative S1 + be + short adj +ER + S2 i.. + than. more + long adj *Exercise :Rewrite these sentences:. Guides Ss to do exercise Work in pairs (2’) Calls some Ss to write on the board Corrects mistakes. Your bike is newer than my bike My bike ……………………………. Hoa is more intelligent than her sister Her sister ………………………….. The city life is busier than the. 30’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span> country life The country life ……………………. Your bag is different from my bag My bag isn’t ………………………... Nobody is taller than Nam Nam is ……………………………… IV Consolidation:3’ - Retell the main points of some Structure grammar. V,Homework 1’ learn by heart the structures review how to do exercise prepare for the first semester test Date of planning :1/1/31 Date of teaching :3/1/13 unit 9:a first –aid course Period 55 getting started –listen and read class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to report an accident and call for an ambulance. - Develop reading and listening skill. * Teaching points : report an accident and call for an ambulance. 2- objective 1- Structure: The future simple tense 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) *Warm up : 5’ * Warm up : Kim,s game ( Getting started ) - Ask Ss to open their books and look at the things on page 80 for 20 seconds. Tell them these things are often used for first - aid - Divide the class into two groups. - Tell them the group having the most right English words is the winner. - Have them open the books again and go through the words in English. Possible answers : + A girl has a burn on her arm -> Use cold water / ice to ease the pain.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span> + A boy has a bad cut on his leg -> Use alcohol / medicated oil / sterile dressing + A girl has a nose bleed -> Use a handkerchief to stop the bleeding / tell her to lie down . + A boy has a bee sting -> Use medicated oil … III New lesson. T Teacher’s activities *Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading 7 and some new words . + Pre teach (Vocabulary ): - First- aid: (n) s¬ cøu(translation) - (an) ambulance : xe cøu th¬ng (Picture) - (an) emergence =cÊp cøu, t×nh tr¹ng khÈn cÊp - unconscious (adj) > < conscious (adj) tØnh t¸o -( to) bleed : ch¶y m¸u(example) - Sterile dressing (n) g¹c v« trïng. (realia) -> Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary in their notebooks * Checking technique: * Slap the board ( Put the new words in Vietnamese on the board ) * Gap filling Prediction - Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board . There was an emergency at Lan,s school . A student …..(1)…. off her bike and hit her head on the road . She was …..(2)…. but she cut her head and the …….(3)…. was ……(4)….. badly . Lan telephoned Bach Mai Hospital and asked the nurse to send an ……(5)….. to Quang Trung School . Lan was asked to keep the student …..(6)…. while waiting for the ambulance . - Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps 15 * While - reading : - Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue , then check their predictions - Give feedback 1. fell 2. conscious 3. cut 4. bleeding 5. ambulance 6. awake * Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and select the topic covered in the dialogue . - Have Ss work in groups to write their answers on a sheet of paper and hand in after finishing . - Collect Ss , papers and give feedback : a- b- c- e- f * Post - reading : *Role play : - Have Ss in turn play the roles to 13 demonstrate the dialogue . * Write - it -up : Ask Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue . - Tell Ss to begin their story with : “ Yesterday there was an emergency at ……. “ - Monitor and help Ss with their work .. Ss’ activities - Copy down new lesson. - Repeat in chorusindividual. - T – Ss. - Whole class - Team work. - Ss predict. - Ss go to the board and write their words.. - Individual work - T – Ss - Listen and check their predictions. - Copy down the answer. - Group work of 4/5 Ss - Pair work - Ss to write a story.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span> using the information from the dialogue .. iv. Consolidation: - Retell the main points: What would you do if a boy has a bad cut on his leg? v. Homework : - Learn by heart new words. - Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook (1,2 / 55 ). - Prepare for the next lesson. Date of planning :.1/1/13 Date of teaching :4/1/13 unit 9:a first –aid course Period 56 speak –lf 4 class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice about request / offers / promises/ response. - Develop speaking skill. 2- objective 1- Structure: can/could/would/shall …+ S + V 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new word and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. *Warm up : 5’ III New lesson. Teacher's activities I. Pre- speaking Vocabulary Ambulance : Xe cøu th¬ng Handker chief : Kh¨n tay Wound : VÕt th¬ng Conscious Trong tr¹ng th¸i tØnh t¸o Speak page 81. Time Students' activities 6’ -Students take note. -Students listen and repeat. Students observe..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span> -Teacher explains the phrase words to talk about the requests, offers, promises and reponses. -Teacher reads. II . While- Speaking 15’ -Teacher introduces the pictures. -Teacher asks students take roles and practice before the class. -Teacher corrects if students make mistake.. III. Post- speaking 5 Situations - Lan has a bee sting - Minh has a headache -Teacher gives the situation in real life and asks students practice. 5 Language focus 4 -Teacher introduces the pictures in text book page 88 -Teacher explains the words in the box. -Teacher asks student practice in pairs 7 -Teacher remarks and give marks.. -Students practice using the requests, offers, and promises. b) Sister: Can I get some medicine? Boy: Yes, please c) A: Can I get you some bandage? B: That would be nice d) Daughter: You must have fever. Would you like some medicine? Mother: Yes, please e) Boy: I promise I won’t play soccer in the house again. Mother: I hope so Ss do. Ss practice ex before the class * Cues answers b) A : Will you paint the door, please ? B : Yes, of couse c) A : Will you study harder, please ? B : That would be nice d) A : Will you carry the bag for me ? B : OK e) A : Will you hang the washing, please ? B : All right a) A : Will you cut the grass, please ? B : Sure. iv. Consolidation: - Retell the main points v. Homework : Learn by heart new word and the phrases - Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook (1,2 / 55 ). - Prepare for the next lesson.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span> Date of planning :5/1/13 Date of teaching :7/11/13 unit 9:a first –aid course Period 57 listen –lf 2,3 class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to understand the passage and put the name of things in the picture in the correct order. 2- objective 1- Structure: present progressive tense 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new word and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. *Warm up : 5’ Warm up : Chatting Have you ever been to the hospital? Can you tell the class some things in a hospital?. Teacher’s activities A- Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words * Pre teach vocabulary : - an eye chart : b¶ng ®o thÞ lùc - scale(n) :cai can - a wheelchair: xe lăn ( using the picture ) - a stretcher : c¸ng ( picture ) - a crutch -> crutches: c©y n¹ng ( picture ). Students’ activities 8 - Listen to and copy down new lesson. -Repeat in chorus..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span> * Checking technique : What and where * Matching : - Ask Ss to look at the picture in their books again and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in the box . - Give feedback A -> ambulance D -> eye chart B -> wheelchair E -> scale C -> crutches F -> stretcher B-While – listening : 15 * Order Prediction - Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words - Put the words in the table Guess key ambulance 3 wheelchair 2 crutches 6 eye chart 4 scale 5 stretcher 1 - Have Ss copy and guess the order of the words - Play the tape and ash Ss to listen - Ask Ss to give their answers and correct *. True / False statements - Stick the chart with the statements on the board : + A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency room . + The patient’ s head is bandaged + A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient sitting on it . + The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the different size . + The baby,s mother is trying to stop the nurse from weighing her baby . - Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and check if they understand the meaning of the statements - Have Ss work in pairs to decide which of the statements is true and which is false . - Play the tape and have Ss listen ( 2 or 3 times ) - Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback * Language focus 2 : - Revision the Future simple - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue and exchange their roles. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .. T – Ss Ss copy down. - Ss to look at the picture in their books again and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in the box. - T- Ss / individual work - Ss are going to listen to a paragraph about the activities taking place in an emergency room which contains the words on the board - Group work of 4/5 Ss - Ss copy and guess the order of the words \ Whole class - Ss to read the statements carefully and check if they understand the meaning of the statements - Ss work in pairs to decide which of the statements is true and which is false . - Ss to read their answers and give feedback. Individual 1. False ( a paramedic not a doctor ) 2. True 3. False ( empty wheelchair not with a patient 4. True 5 . False ( stop her baby from crying ) Ss do exercise 1. will 2. will 3. won,t , 4. Shall 5. will 6. , ll Ss look at the picture and do ex c. Will you answer the.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span> - Give feedback : * Language focus 3 : Nga is helping her grandmother . Look at the pictures and complete the sentences . Use the words under each picture and Will :. telephone , please ? 7 d. Will you turn on the TV , please , Nga ? e. Will you pour a glass of water for me , please ? f. Will you get me a cushion , please IV- Consolidation :2’ - Retell the main points of this lesson: to listen for details about the activities talking place in an emergency room . - to use modal will to make requests, offer and promises V- Homework : 3’ 1 Let Ss do the exercises ( 3,4 p.56 in the workbook) 2. Prepare the next lesson Date of planning :5/1/13 Date of teaching :8/1/13 unit 9:a first –aid course Period 58 read –lf 1 class :a81-5 I-Aim and objectives 1-the aim - Provides sts some new words. - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know about the first aid produce for different situations - Develop reading skill. 2- objective 1- Structure: Imperative form 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new word and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. *Warm up : 5’ : Chatting What do you if your friend has a fainting, a shock, a burn? Teacher’s activities. A- Pre – reading : some new words to Ss . 1. Pre – teach vocabulary : - (to) lie flat : phßng chê ( mime / drawing ) - (to) elevate: nhấc lên (mime) - (a) victim: nạn nhân (explanation) - (to) overheat : trở nên quá nóng (translation) - Tissue damage(n) : tæn th¬ng, mæ (translation) - (to) ease : lµm dÔ chÞu, lµm dÞu ®i (translation). T. Ss’ activities. 10 - Have Ss copy down. - Repeat in chorusindividual..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span> * Checking technique : Rub out and remember * Network - Draw the network with some examples on the board - Ask Ss to think of what to do in these emergency cases - Collect and write the students, ideas on the bard First - aids Shock. Fainting Burns. B-While – reading : - Have Ss open their books and read the instructions * Matching : - Ask Ss to read the statements / page 84 and match tree Leadings A , B , C to them . Give feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d * Grid : - Draw the grid on the board . - Ask Ss to read the instructions again and fill the information . - Call on some Ss to the board to write their answers - Give feedback Cases Do - Leave the patient lying flat . , Fainting - Elevate the patients feet or lower his / her head . - Give him / her a cup of tea when he / she revives . Shock. Burns. Don,t - Do not force him / her to sit or stand .. - Do not overheat the victim with blankets or coat - Do not give the victim any food or drink or drug .. - Cool the burn immediately to minimize the tissue damage . - Put the affected part under a running cold tap . - Ease the pain with ice or cold water packs . - Cover the burned area with a thick sterile dressing .. - Have Ss copy the grid in their notebooks . C- Post – reading : - Ask Ss to work in groups to continue discussing how to give first aid * Language focus 1: + Negative purposes : * In order( not) to +V../ *So as (not) to +V.. * Use: to express an action’s purpose.. - Rewrite words. - T – Ss - Ss to think of what to do in these emergency cases. - Whole class -Ss to go to the board and add the missing 15 information. - Individual - Ss to read the instructions again and fill the information . - Some Ss to the board to write their answers - Individual. - Pair work. - Group work ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span> * Matching : Ex 1. - Some volunteers from - Ask Ss to read the example aloud and ask them to each group to demonstrate match one part of a sentence from column A with in front of class . another part in column B Key :1- f , 2- c , 3- b , 4 - Call on some Ss to read their answers and give – e , 5- a , 6feedback 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson : What have you learnt?. 5. Homework : Date of planning :8/1/13 Date of teaching :10/1/13 unit 9:a first –aid course Period 59 write class :a81-5 A-Aim and objectives 1-the aim By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to write a thank you note or a certain letter 2- objective 1- Structure: the present simple tense, simple past, simple future 2- skill: pair work, group work, question and answer. B. preparation : teacher: Text books, poster students: notebook ,book C procedures: I. Organization ( 1’ ) - Greeting. - Checking numbers of sts. II. Checking up + warm up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new word and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. *Warm up : 5’ Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities 1. Pre -writing vocabulary: 5 ss give some (to) thank (so) for (st) : c¸m ¬n ai vÒ ®iÒu g× suggestions for first aid (to) cheer (so) up :lµm ai phÊn khëi / vui (to) come over Checking vocabulary: “ rub out and remember Set the scene: Nga was sick and she had to go to hospital. After she left the hospital, She wrote a thank you note to Hoa Have ss read the thank you note and ask some questions Listen a. Asnswer the question Repeat chorally Ask ss to work in pairs Repeat individully -Give feed back 5 Copy 1. Who did Nga write to ? Rewrite the words 2. why did she write the note? 3. How did nga feel? 4. when did Nga come out of the hospital?.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span> 5 How does Nga feel now? 6.How will Hoa contact Hoa ? b. Gap fill 5 Ask ss to look at the letter on page 84 and complete it with the right verb forms - monitor and help ss with the tense forms Call on some ss to give their answers and correct 1. was 2. were 3. helped 4. came 5 am 6. will phone 2. While- writing Question and answer Tell ss they are going to write a thank you note to a friend - put the poster with the questions (p85) on the board -Ask some ss to answer the question orally Have ss practice speaking to each other 5 -Monitor and correct Ask ss to join the sentences into a paragraph to make it a thank you note - Tell ss to write their letters 3. Post-writing Correction: Choose some letters to correct before class. Dear Lan Thank you very much for the book you sent me while I 10 treated my disease at home. They were very interesting and helped me relax a lot. I love reading them very much. Now, I feel very sad I want to go out to enjoy the fresh air. Do you want to go on a picnic this Sunday? If yes, I’ll come and pick you up. I’m looking forwards to hearing from you. 5’ Your friend Nga. Ss listen. Work in pair. Work individually then compare with their partners. Work in pairs answer the questions writing letters to friends. 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main point soft this lesson. 5. Homework : 1. Ask Ss to use the same format to write another letter to another friend for another occasion . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . + T: Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan, CD, cassette. + Ss : textbook, notebook, pen.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span> Date of Preparing :10/1/ 12 Unit 10: recycling. Date of teaching : 12/1/12 period :60 Listen and read, getting started. class:8a1-6 aThe aims and objectives. 1. The aims: Helps students know some vocabulary about the recycling. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: By the end of the lesson, students will able to able to express polite, request and listen to a conversation about recycling. b. Skills: listening, speaking and reading. A. Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: lesson plan, textbooks, poster, cassette. 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks, and other tools. B. Procedures. I. Organization(1’) Greeting +checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up.(5’). III. New lesson (35’) Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities 1. Pre-teach: 7’ - (to) recycle: t¸i sö dông (Trans). - Listen - (to) reduce: c¾t gi¶m (Exp). - Listen and repeat. - (to) reuse: dïng l¹i (Exp). - Copy down. - (to) throw: nÐm ra, th¶i ra (Mime). - (to) contact: liªn kÕt, liªn hÖ (Trans). - representative: tiªu biÓu (Trans). - (to) protect: b¶o vÖ (Exp). + Check vocabulary: Rubout and remember. 2. Presentation: - Sets the scene: - Listen and copy down. Model sentences: 5’ I am pleased that you want to know more about recycling. - Asks students to check the meaning, form, use. - Do T/ F. Form: S + tobe + adj + that – clause. It’s + to be + to Vinf …. Use: Adj followed by a noun clause / an infinitive 3’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span> - Hangs the poster with T/ F statements on it. 1. Miss Black is from "friend of the earth". 2. She is teaching at Que Nham School at the moment. 3. "Friend of the earth" wants to use up all 20’ the natural resources. - Gets feedback. 3. Reading: - Asks students to read the introduction to - Read the introduction to the the dialogue and check the T/ F answers. dialogue and check the T/ F 1. T; 2. F; 3. T; 4. F. answers. - Asks students to listen to the dialogue and - Practice to the dialogue in groups repeat (2-3 times). of 4. - Asks students to practice to the dialogue in groups of 4. - Asks students to look at the questions on the poster and answer them. a) "Reduce" means not buying products which are over packed. b) We can reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic, bottles, and plastics bag. c) "Recycle" means not just throwing things always. Try and find another use for them. d) We can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an organization like friends of the earth" going to the local library and ask your family or friends. e) Because when we through them away, they could stay very long and could not be self destroyed. - Listens and checks their answer. 4-Post-reading: Ps answer T asks Ps some questions * What should we do to reduce the amount of garbage? IV) Consolidation (2’): - What have you studied about to day? V) Homework (2’): - ask ss to read the dialogue again, answer the questions. - Prepare new lesson..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span> Date of Preparing :15/1/ 12 Unit 10: recycling. Date of teaching : 16/1/12 period :61 speak class:8a1-6 AThe aims and objectives. 1. The aims: help Ss practice in giving and responding to instructions. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: b. By the end of the lesson , Ss can give and respond to instructions. c. Skills :speaking B Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, poster, word cues. 2. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C.Procedures. I. Organization: (2’) Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up.(5’) Write the vocabulary in last period Warm up : Kim,s game * Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers , books , cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars , plastic bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable matter , clothes , shoes , school bags … III. New lesson: (35’) Teacher’s activities * Speak A/ Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some new words to students . * Pre-teach vocabulary : - Fertilizer (n) : phân bón (example) -> to fertilize : làm cho mầu mỡ, phì nhiêu. - Compost (n) : phân xanh (example) - Fabric (n) = sîi (v¶i) (synonym) - Leather (n) :: da (realia) + Have Ss copy in their notebooks . Checking technique : Bingo *Dictation list :. T 35’. Students’ activities. - Listen. - Listen and repeat in chorus, individual - Copy. - Play game..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span> - Tell Ss they are going to listen to the words for items and put them into the right groups . - Draw the table on the words and put them in the right columns . - Model some words . - Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up - After listening , ask Ss to work in pairs and give their answers .. - Do individually. * Possible answer: Paper: used paper. Glass: ( bottles , glasses , jars ) …… - Work in pairs.. - Read the words again and correct. Group Paper. Items used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard boxes ( bottles , glasses , jars ) (Plastic bags , plastic bottles ) ( food cans , drinking tins ..) Clothes ( cloth bags , material ) ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags ) Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits ). Glass Plastic Metal Fabric Leather Vegetabl e matter B- While – speaking : Mapped dialogue : - Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board . - Elicit the exchanges from students - Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange . - Ask a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue . a. Open pairs : - Ask some pairs to practice in front of class . b. Closed pairs : - Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list - Monitor and correct . A B +Which group ( do Put ( them ) in fabric clothes ) belong to ? +What can we do with We can ( recycle them ( those clothes ) ? and make them into +Is / are ( fruit paper or shopping bags . vegetable matter ) ? That is right +What will we do with We make ( it into (it ) ? compose and fertilizer our field . ) C-Post speaking : - Call 2 groups to practice again. - T and ss correct.. - Teacher – Ss. - Pair work - Ss to work in pairs and give their answers . - some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange . - Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list. - Pair work.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span> IV. V.. Consolidation: (2’) retell main points. Homework (1’): - Do the exercise 3 in exercise's book. - Prepare new lesson.. Date of Preparing :15/1/ 12 Unit 10: recycling. Date of teaching : .18/1/12 period :62 listen+ language focus 3. class:8a1-6 A. The aims and objectives. 1 The aims: -To help Ss listen to choose the best answer . 2 Objectives: a-Language focus: -By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to listen to choose the best answer and practice the structures with the adjectives b-Skills: Listening and writing. B. Preparation. 3. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, poster, tape recorder, cassette. 4. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures. I-Organization: (2’) Greeting + checking member. II-Checking the old lesson + warm up.(5’) Do you know compost? What is compost made from ? How is it made ? III-New lesson: (35’) Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities. 1. Pre-teach: - shade (n): Bãng m¸t 08' - Listen - heap: Một đống - Listen and repeat. - Rat chuột - Copy down. -Pick cuốc chim - Shovel (n) cái xẻng -Pile (n) đống - Shell (n) : vỏ sò - (a) compost heap/pile: đống phân xanh. - grain product (n): sản phẩm ngũ cốc - condensation (n): sự ngưng tụ, cô đọng - moisture (n): hơi ẩm + Check vocabulary: Matching. 2. Pre-listening:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span> - Asks students to open their book and look at the book and predict the answers to the 5’ questions on page 91. - Gets feedback. 3. While-listening: - Multiple choice: - Asks students to listen and choose the answers 12' then checks their prediction. 1. A. 2. B. 3. A. 4. B. 4. Post-listening: - Model sentences: It's difficult to follow your instruction. 10' + Form: Adj + to + V(inf)... * Practice: Word cues drill: a) dangerous/ drive fast. b) easy/ learn English. c) glad/ see you again. d) cold/ swim in winter. Exercise 3: Asks students to complete the dialogue with the correct form of the adjective + to V(infinitive). 1. easy to understand. 2. hard to believe. 3. dangerous to go. 4. important to wait. *Exercise: Rewrite these sentences using “It is + adj + to Vinf”: 1.To go swimming is interesting->…………. 2.To make her laugh is easy->……………… 3.To understand him is difficult->………… 4.To help mum at home is good->………… - Gets feedback: 1. It’s interesting to go swimming 2. It’s easy to make her laugh 3. It’s difficult to understand him 4. It’s good to help mum at home. VI. Consolidation: (2’) retell main points. VII. Homework (1’): - Do the exercise 4, 5 in exercise's book. - Prepare new lesson.. - Predict. - Give the answers. - Listen.. - Give the correct answers. - listen and do.. - Do exercise in individual.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span> Date of Preparing :28/1/12 Date of teaching : 30/1/12 period :63 class:8a1-6. Unit 10: recycling. read. AThe aims and objectives. 1-The aims: Reading for the instruction about some more situations which require first- aid. 2-Objectives: Language focus: By the end of the lesson , Ss can use in order to and so as to to indicate purposes Skills: reading. B-preparation 1-Teacher’s: Lesson plan, poster, word cues. 2-Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C-produces I-Organization: (2’) Greeting + checking member. II-Checking the old lesson + warm up.(5’) Network: What items can - bottles. - Paper. be recycled. - Glass. - Plastic. - Cans. - Tires. Iii-New lesson: (35’) Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activities. 1. Pre-teach: 08’ - Listen - tire (n): Lèp xe (Visual). - Listen and repeat. - pipe (n): èng níc (Explanation). - Copy down. - (to) melt: Nãng (Translation). - household (n): Vật dụng gia đình - (to) refill: Lµm ®Çy l¹i (Translation). - deposit (n): Tiền đặt cọc (Explanation). + Check vocabulary: What and where. - Predict. 2. Pre-reading: T/F statement prediction: 5’ 1. Millions of old car tires are throw away in the USA every year. 2. Tires can be recycled to make books or.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span> computers. 3. People collect empty milk bottles to clean and refill them. 4. Milk bottles can be used many times. 5. Glass can't be recycled. - Give the answers. 6. If we want to recycle glass, we have to melt it. - Read and check. 7. Cans can be recycled. 8. Farmers use food waste to build theirs houses. - Gets feedback. - Work in pair. 3. While-reading: - Asks students to read the passage and 15’ check their prediction. 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 6. T 7. T 8. F - Asks students to work in pair to answer the questions (page 93). a) People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles with milk. b) The glass is broken up, melt and made in to new glassware when it is sent to - Do the exercise 2. factories. c) The Oregon government made a new law - Role play. that there must be deposit on all drink cans. The deposit is turned when people bring the cans back for recycling. d) Compost is made from household and garden waste. e) If we have a recycling story to share. We can fax or call the magazine at 5565456. - Asks students to complete the sentences in 7’ exercise 2 (93). 4. Post-reading: - Role play: Students A and B are friends; student A see student B throwing away a large pile of garbage. Many items can be recycled. Student A tells student B items can be reused and which can not. VIII. Consolidation: (2’) retell main points. IX. Homework (1’): - Do the exercise Unit 9 + Unit 10 in exercise's book. - Prepare new lesson..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span> Date of Preparing :28/ 1/12 Unit 10: recycling. Date of teaching : 31/2/12 period :64 write class:8a1-6 AThe aims and objectives. 1-The aims: To help Ss to write a set of instructions on how to recycle used things 2-Objectives: a-Language focus: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a set of instructions , using the sequencing. b-Skills: writing. B Preparation. 1-Teacher’s: Lesson plan, poster, word cues. 2-Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C Procedures. I-Organization: (2’) Greeting + checking member. II-Checking the old lesson + warm up.(5’) S1: Write vocabulary. S2: Read the passage and answer the question. + Warm up: Put the following word in the right order. Next/ first/ finally/ then. III-New lesson: (35’) Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activities. 1. Pre-teach: 07' - (to) soak: Nhóng níc (Translation). - Listen - (to) press: Ên (Explanation). - Listen and repeat. - (to) mix: Trén lÉn (Translation). - Copy down. - bucket (n): C¸i x« (Explanation). - mesh (n): M¹ng líi (Explanation). + Check vocabulary: Rubout and remember. 2 Pre-writing: - Answer. a) Pre-questions: 05' What do people often recycled?.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span> Is it a good or not good to recycle items? Why? - Gets feedback. b) Ordering verbs: - Asks students to order 8 verbs in exercise 1 that they appear in the text. 08' - Gets feedback. 1. use 2. mix 3. place 4. press. 5.wrap 6. wait 7. dry Feedback First , soak old newspaper in a bucket overnight . Then , mash the paper by a wooden spoon . Next , mix the mashed paper with water . After that , use a wire mesh to pull the mixture out , put it on the cloth and press it down firmly . Finally , take the mesh out of the cloth & dry it in the sun 3. While-writing: - Asks students to look at the pictures and 10' make the instructions on how to prepare the tea leaves using the given words in the box. a) First, take the used tealeaves from the teapot. b) Next, scatter the tealeaves on a tray. c) Then, dry the leaves in the sun. d) Finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for future use. 4. Post-writing: Role play: - Asks students to work in pairs to make 05 questions and give the answers about how to dry tea leaves. Eg: What do we do first? What do we do after that? And then? And finally? IV-Consolidation: (2’) retell main points. V -Homework (1’): - Learn vocabulary by heart. - Prepare new lesson.. - Order.. - Write.. - Play role..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span> Date of preparing:28 /1/2012 Date of teaching: 1/2/2012 class:8a1-6. pcriod 65. Unit 10 : Recycling Language Focus 1,2,4. A The aims and objectives. 1-The aims: - To help Ss to practice future practice the simple present tense , the simple future tense of passive - To help Ss express their feelings using adjectives 2-Objectives: a-Language focus: By the end of the lesson , Ss can practice future practice in the simple present tense , the simple future tense of passive b-Skills: B-Preparation. 1-Teacher’s: Lesson plan, poster, word cues. 2-Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C-Procedures. 1-Organization: (2’) Greeting + checking member. II-Checking the old lesson + warm up.(5’) Retells the instruction of making tealeaves. * Warm up :. Questions game. - Call on a student to go to the board and give him or her a job name . - Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking yes-no questions - The chosen student can only answer yes or no - Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a point and take the place of the last chosen student . Example questions : - Do you get a big salary ? Do you wear uniform III. New lesson Teacher’s activities T Ss’activities Language focus 1. Passive Form in the Present Simple : 5’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span> S + am / is / are + past participle => It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the verb . - Pair work *Work with a partner. LF 1-p.95 : Ordering pictures : + Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the 15’ - Retell and copy. pictures to put them in the correct order according to the instructions + Call on some groups to give their answers . + Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6 - Pair work * Writing : + Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form - Teacher – Ss + Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to the board and write their sentences + Correct and give feedback: - Pair work 1. The glass is broken into small pieces. 2. The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid. - Individual 3. The glass pieces are dried completely. * Possible answer: 4. Then the glass is washed with a detergent liquid. 1. The glass is broken 5. They are mixed with certain specific chemicals. into small pieces. 6. A long pipe is used. It is dipped into the liquid. 2. The mixture is melted Then the liquid is blown into intended shapes. until it becomes a liquid. 2. LF 2-p.96: Passive Form in the Future Simple 3. The glass pieces are S + will / shall + be + past participle 8’ dried completely. - Have Ss copy down 4. Then the glass is - Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in washed with a detergent the gaps , using the Passive liquid. - Call on Ss to give their answers and correct ….. 1. … will be shown 2. Will … be built …..? 3. … will be finished …. 4. Will … be made … ? 3. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun - Pair work clause 8’ * Possible answer: * It + be + adjective + to infinitive 1. … will be shown * S + be + adj + that / noun clause 2. Will … be built …..? Example: We are delighted that you passed the 3. … will be finished …. English exam . 4. Will … be made … ? - Get Ss to copy . *Complete the letter - Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words . A B Key - Whole class 1. relieved (a) a. xin chuc mung 1.d 2. Congratulation b. trong cho 2.a 3. Look forward to( c. xac nhan lai 3.b 4. confirm (v) d. vui mõng 4. c - Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary - Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using - Individual the words in the box.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span> - Get some Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct. * Exercises: 0. are delighted 1. was happy 2. am relieved 3. is afraid 4. Are … sure … 5. am certain - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud .. - Pair works. - Read the letter aloud. IV Consolidation: (2’) retell main points. V_Homework (1’): 1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents are delighted that he passed his English exam ……” 2. Do the exercises. Preparing date:4/2/12 Teaching date :4/2/12. Unit 11 TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM Getting started Listen and read+ f l3.. Period 66 .. class: 8a1-6 A . The aims and objectives. 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some expressions to express their interest . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: Reading for details about how to express Ss’ interest b. Skills: listening, speaking B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbooks, cassette, chalks, boards, posters, lesson plan. 2. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organizaton: (2’)-Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up and warm up: (5’) : Jumbled words - Write the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board. Places of interest Ha long bay Nha Rong harbor => Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple Literature , Nha rong Harbor . III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities 1. Getting Started : 5’ Team work - Ask Ss to open their books and match the names with the pictures Watch EL TV - Call on some Ss to give their answers a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Na rong Harbor c. The Temple Literature.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span> d. Ha Long Bay - Call some Ss to read the proper names aloud . 2. Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students . *. Pre- teach Vocabulary : - Crop (n) : mua vu . - Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar ) - Water buffalo (n) : con trau - forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N Ex :a3–month vacation /a thirteen–year–old – boy * Checking vocabulary : Bingo +. Guiding questions : a. where does Hoa meet The Jones ? b. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam? c. How do they travel to Ha Noi ? d. What do they see along the road to Ha Noi ? e. What would Tim like to do ? - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions - Call on some pairs to give their answers - Feedback : a. Hoa meets The Jones at the airport b. Yes , it is . c. By taxi d. They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies , corn and sugar cane fields e. He would like to take a photo . 3. While – reading : - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False a. T b. T d. T e . T c. F -> … in a taxi f. F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown around Ha Noi . - Call on some groups of five to practice the dialogue in front of class - Correct their pronunciation 4. Post – reading : Discussion - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the situations mentioned below . * to express interest : - I,d like you to meet my parents ….- It is nice to meet you -It is great to be in Viet Nam .- I would to sit with Tim. Individual 7’ Listen and copy Teacher – Ss individual and choral. Whole class Individual. 1 0’. Pair work Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions Whole class Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False some groups of five to practice the dialogue in front of class Individual Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them. 1 0’. 3’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span> * to express a request : - Would you mind sitting in the front seat … - Would you mind if I took a photo ? 1. Language focus 3 : Cardboard Drill - Pair work - Prepare 4 cardboards with cues including checks - Teacher – Ss (v) and crosses (x) - Side - side - Open pairs->Close pair. a. move / car (v) c. get / coffee (x) - Some volunteers from each b. put out / cigarette (v) d. wait / moment (x) group to practice in front of Model : T :Would you mind moving your car ? class . Ss : No , of course not . Teacher – Ss - Call on 2 or 3 Ss to repeat it and correct . + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the class. + Closed pairs : Get the whole class to practice IV Consolidation(2’) - Retell the main points of this lesson. V. Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to give some examples .. Preparing date:4/2 /12 Teaching date : 6/2/12 Period 67 .. Unit 11 TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM speak +language focus 4. class: 8a1-6 A . The aims and objectives 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: Do you mind (if) . . .? Would you mind (if) . . . . .? b. Skills: listening, speaking B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbooks, posters, lesson plan. 2. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2’)-Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up and warm up: (5’) * Warm up : What does it say ? - Choose a student and ask him / her to go to the front of the class with his / her back to the board so that he / she can not see what is written on the board .. Teacher’s activities A/ Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some structures 1. Pre- teach structures : Model sentences : 1. A : Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi? B : No problem . 2. A : Would you mind if I took a photo ? B : Not at all .. T 5’. Ss’ activities - Whole class.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span> => Used to make and respond to formal requests Form : 1. Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …? 2. Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple) …? Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple ) ..? Agreement: No , I do not mind . / No , of course no . / Not at all . / Please do . / Please go head . Disagreement : I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible I,d prefer you did not . / I,d rather you did not . - Get Ss to copy and give some more examples with suggested words 2. Cardboard Drill : 1. move your car ? (v ) / 2. go out with me ? ( x) 3. wait for me ? (x) / 4. Get / coffee ? (v) / 5. Smoke ? (x) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . B/ While – speaking : - Ask Ss to work in pairs + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the exchanges + Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the exchanges - Give feedback. - Teacher – Ss. 5’. 15’ - Ss to copy and give some more examples with suggested words. Mapped dialogue. You Tourist officer Excuse me ! Yes ? I would like to visit a market. Not at all . Would you How about shopping to mind suggesting one ? Thai Binh Market ? That sounds It opens from about interesting . Thank 5 am to pm . you . You are welcome . C/ Post – speaking : 2. Language focus 4 : + Gap fill - Put the gap – fill chart on the board . - Ask Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the gaps . 1. Would you mind …… me something about it ? 2. Do you mind if I …… you a question ? 3. Would you please …. this new word to me ? 4. Would you mind if I ….. the television ? Answer Key : 1 .telling 2 .ask 3 .explain 4. turned off + Ordering pictures - Ask Ss to write the numbers and look at the pictures , listen to the situations and order the pictures ( 1-> 6 ). - Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr. Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit the sentences from Ss .. - Whole class. - Some pairs to practice in front of class . - Ss work in pairs 10’. + Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the class..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span> 1. turn on the stereo 2. watch TV while eating - Ss to use the right 3. sit down 4. postpone the meeting words in the box to 5. turn on the air – conditioner 6. smoke fill in the gaps . - Ask Ss to give their answers 1.d 2.f 3.a 4.c 5.e 6.b IV Consolidation(2’) - Retell the main points of this lesson. V. Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to give some examples .. Preparing date: 5/2/12 Unit 11 TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM Teaching date : 7/2/12 Period 68 . listen +language focus 1,2 class: 8a1-6 A / The aims and objectives: 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen and match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map . Ss will be able to use Present and Past participles to describe things and people 2. Objectives : a. language focus: Further Practice in prepositions of place to talk about location. b. Skills: listening and writing. B/Preparation: Teacher’s: Text books , cassette , lesson plan. posters, and a chart. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I . Organization: (2’)- Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up and warm up: III. New lesson:. Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-listening: +. Pre – teach vocabulary : - Highway ( n) - Tourist information center (n) +. Set the scene “ The Jones family are going around Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in the maps . Listen to them and match the places to the correct positions on the maps “ 2. While – listening : - Ask Ss to list the places on the maps .. T 5’. Students’ activities Individual Ss guess their correct positions on the map Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board. Teacher – Ss.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span> - Play the tape 2 or 3 times Whole class - Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends . 10’ - Call on some Ss to read their answers and give the correct answers Work in group Answer key : a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station Individual d) pagoda e) temple 3.Post – listening : 5’ - Have Ss repeat chorally while listening to the tape . - Correct their pronunciation Pair work 4. Language focus 1+2: 7’ Individual a. Language focus 1 : - Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then Ss to open their books and correct . look at the picture / 108 and T : What is Mr Quang doing ? set the scene “ It is time for Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs . recess and the people at T : What is Miss Lien doing ? Quang Trung school are in Ss : She is carrying a bag . the school yard . What are Model sentences : they doing ? “ The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang Whole class ( present participle phrase ) 7’ Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with active meaning b. Language focus 2 : * Matching - Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the picture / 109 to do the matching A B Key 1. box a. wrap in 1. f 2. truck b. dress in 2. c 3. lamp c. recycled from 3. e 4. doll d. keep in 4. b 5. flowers e. made in 5. a 6. toys f. paint 6. d => Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ? Model Sentences : The old lamp made in China is five dollars . ( past participle phrase ) vForm : Regular verb + ed Past participle Irregular verb Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with passive meaning .. Listen and copy . Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard . What are they doing ? Ss to look at the words in the box and the picture / 109 to do the matching some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions and answer.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span> IV. Consolidation: (2’)- Retell the main points. V. Homework : (1’) 1. Learn by heart new words . 2. Prepare the next lesson .. Preparing date :6/2/12 Unit 11 TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM Teaching date : 9/2/12 Period 69 . read class: 8a1-6 A / The aims and objectives: 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get the information from simple tourist advertisements . 2. Objectives : a. language focus: Read the short advertisements to understand the details of different places in Viet Nam. b. Skills: listening and writing. B/Preparation: 1.Teacher’s: Text books , cassette , lesson plan. word square chart . pictures. 2.Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up and warm up(5’) - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson. -T corrects and give them marks. III. New lesson:. Teacher’s activities 1. Pre- reading : + Pre – teach vocabulary : - accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay in - giant (adj ) = huge / very big - slope (n) - jungle (n) = a very thick forest. T 8’. Students’ activities Individual Teacher – Ss.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span> - limestone (n) = da voi - florist (n) : a person who sells flowers - to import >< to export + Checking vocabulary : What and where Whole class 2. While – reading : 10’ Individual * Grid : - Ask Ss to read the advertisements about the Pair work resorts and check (v) the topics mentioned in the grid Ss to read the advertisements - Call on some Ss to give their answers about the resorts and check (v) Answer Key : the topics mentioned in the + Nha Trang : Flights to Ha Noi , railway , hotels grid , local transport , tourist attractions . + Da Lat : Hotels , local transport , waterfalls , Ss to work in pairs to compare tourist attractions their answer + Sa Pa : Hotels , local transport , mountain slopes tourist attractions , villages . + Ha Long Bay : World Heritage , tourist Whole class attractions , sand beaches , railways , hotels , caves , locals transport . Individual - Have Ss copy down *. Matching : 7’ - put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match Ss to open their books , read the words or phrases in Column A to column B the text on page 105 and check (v) the boxes . A B 1. Nha Trang a. tribal villages , mountain Ss to ask and answer questions 2. Da lat climbing using the information in the 3. Sa Pa b. The place where President Ho text. 4. Ha long Chi Minh left Viet Nam in 1911. Bay c. Swimming and sunbathing . Individual 5. Nha Rong d. Oceanic Institute Pair work Harbor e. Flower gardens . - Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to Teacher – Ss connect the words Answer Key : 1. d 2.e 3.a 4.c 5.b Pair work +. Grid some pairs to practice in front - Get Ss to open their books , read the text on of class . page 105 and check (v) the boxes . Individual - Monitor and correct . 3. Post – reading : Role play 10’ - Tell Ss to ask and answer questions using the information in the text . + Write the model on the board . A : Where should ( Andrew ) go ? B : He should go to ( Sa Pa ) . A : Why ? B : Because ( he studies tribes and he likes.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span> mountain – climbing ) - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking . - Monitor and correct - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class . IV. Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this lesson. V. Homework : 1. Redo the exercises and copy in their notebooks . 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . 3. Prepare the next lesson .. Preparing date :12/2/12 Unit 11 TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM Teaching date : 14/2/12 Period 70 . write class: 8a1-6 A) the aims and objectives: 1) The aims: - Helps students know some vocabulary about the traveling. - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a narrative. - They have a chance to listen. 2) Objectives: a. Language focus: Writing short paragraph to retell what happen in the past and writing a past tense. b. Skills: writing. B) Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, text book, and posters, overhead. 2. Student’s: Text book, notebook. C) Procedures: I) Organization: (2’) - Greeting+ checking member. II) Checking up and warm up (5'): - Checks and gives them marks. III) New lesson (35'):. Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-teach: - an adventure [ed'vent∫ə] : Cuéc phu lu ( Translation). T Sts’ activities 05’ - Listen three times. - Listen and repeat..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span> - (to) paddle ['pædl]: ChÌo thuyÒn -Read individually. ( Explanation) - Copy down all the - paddle (n): M¸i chÌo, words. - a canoe (n) [kə'nu:] : Ca n«. - Listen only. - to hire : thuê mướn (example) - Read the story. - to overturn : lật úp, lật ngược (mime) - to rescue : giải thoát, cứu nguy (example - Gives answer. * Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember. 2. Writing: + Pre-writing: 05’ - Sets the scene: - Asks students to read the first part of the story and answer the questions: 1- Where was the Brown’s family last week? 2- What did they do there? 3- What happen to them when they were padding in the middle of the lake? - Do exercise 1 P 106 by - Check the students’ understanding. working in pairs. 1- The Brown’s family was on vacation in Dalat. c->a ->g->d ->f ->b-> e 2- They hided a canoe and decided to paddle around XH lake in that canoe. 3- Dark clouds soon appeared and it began to rain. - Look at the picture and - Write after reading the first part of the story and then put them in order to asks them to complete the story by putting the make a story. sentences in the correct order (Exercise 1 P 106). - Gets feed back. + While-writing: - Asks students to look at the pictures and put them in the write order to make a story about Uyen. Key: D-B-E-H-A-F-C-G. - Asks students to work individually using a prompt 15’ - Listen and work in word under the pictures to make meaningful story. group of 6 to make a Begin with: Uyen had a day to remember last week. story. She. . . . . . . . . . . . d) She had math on Friday and she got up late. b) She realized that her alarm clock did not go off. e) As she was leaving it started to rain heavily. h) Uyen tried to run as fast as she could. a) Suddenly she stumbled a rock and fell. f) Her schoolbag was in a pool and everything got wet c) Strangely the rain stopped as she got to her classroom. g) Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish her test. 3. Post writing: - Chain game: - Asks students to work in group of 6, make a story 10’ about their memorable story..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span> Eg: S1: I had a day to remember last week. S2: I had a day to remember last week, I went to. . .. IV) Consolidation (2’): - What have you studied about to day? V) Homework (1’): - Asks students to learn by heart the lesson. - Prepare new lesson. Preparing date :12/2 Teaching date : 15/2 Period 71 class: 8a1-6. REVISION. A/ The aims and objectives: 1.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present and Past participles to describe things and people and the requests with “ Would / Do you mind if …..? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …? “ ,passive forms ………. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit 9 to 12 b. Skills: listening, speaking, reading, and writing.. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s:-Text books, lesson plan, posters . 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)- Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up and warm up(5’) -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities I. Grammar: 10’ - Listen and write down..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span> 1.in order to/ so as to 2. Future simple. 3. Modal will to make requests, offers and promises. 4. passive forms( hientd, qkd, tlaid). 5. Adjectives followed by – an infinitive- a noun clause. Adj + to V/ Adj + clause. 6. –ed and –ing participles. 7. Would/Do you mind if….. - Would/Do you mind + V-ing II. Practice: Ex1: Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2,5 ps) 25’ 1. Would you mind if I ( take ) …………… a photo ? 2. Would you mind ( help ) ……………… her to finish her homework ? 3. Do you mind if we ( get ) ……………. a taxi to town ? 4. The cars ( make ) ……………… from Japan are the best . 5. The man ( talk ) ………………… to your teacher is my uncle . Ex2: Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. Can I use your pen ? => Do you mind ………………? 2. Could you turn off the TV ? => Would you mind ……………….? 3. They built that bridge five years ago . => That bridge ……………. 4. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable ……… Ex3: Complete the sentences with the suitable word or phrase : ( 2,0 ps ) 1. Run ( fast / fastly ) and you can catch the bus . 2. Hung promised to try ( him / his ) best in learning English . 3. I prefer walking to ( riding / ride ) a bicycle . 4. It is a ( thirty – minute / thirty – minutes ) drive from here to the city center . IV) Consolidation (2’): - What have you studied about to day? V) Homework (1’):. - Do individually. Ex1: 1. took 2. helping 3. got 4. made 5. talking.. Ex2: 1. Do you mind if I used your pen? 2. Would you mind turning off the TV? 3. That bridge was built five years ago. 4. All the vegetables and meat are eaten by the children.. Ex3: 1. fast 2. his 3. ride 4. thirtyminute.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span> - Asks students to learn by heart the lesson. - Prepare new lesson. Preparing date :12/2 Teaching date : 16/2 Period 72 class: 8a1-6. REVISION. A/ The aims and objectives: 1.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the passive voice and some models 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit 9 to 12 b. Skills: listening, speaking, reading, and writing.. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s:-Text books, lesson plan, posters . 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)- Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up and warm up(5’) -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. III. New lesson:. Teacher’s and students’ activities Content - T asks ss questions to check them 1. Future simple tense about the future simple tense. +) S + will + V (bare infinitive) - T remarks. -) S + won’t + V (bare infinitive).
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span> ?) Will + S + V (bare infinitive)..? Yes, S + will No, S + won’t *We use Bare infinitive after WILL and other modal verbs 2. Passive form - T asks ss about the form How to change active form to passive form - T calls ss to write the form on the Active: S + V + O board. - T corrects. Passive: S + be + PP + (by + O) * The verb BE in the passive form and the main verb in the active form must be put in -T gives ss some notes the same tense. Ex: Someone stole my car. My car was stolen. Someone has stolen my car. My car has been stolen. * The agent is usually omitted if the subject in the active sentence is: Someone, something, … EXERCISE - T gives ss some exercises to II. Change the sentences into the passive. practice the structures above. 1. peel the apples. - Ss do the exercises. 2. Take out the cores of the apples. 3. Mix the center of the apples with the mixture. - T calls ss to go to the board to do 4. Fill the center of the apples with the the exercises. mixture. - T corrects. 5. Someone has broken the windows. Answer: 1 The apples are peeled. 2. The cores of the apples are taken out 3. The center of the apples are mixed with the mixture. 4. The center of the apples are filled with mixture. 5 The windows have been broken - T asks ss about the form III. Match A with B, using in order to/so as - T calls ss to write the form on the to/to A B board. 1. You should a. pass the - T corrects. wear sunglasses. entrance 2. She went examination to -T gives ss some notes shopping. Medical.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span> *Ss learn by heart the table on page 81 - T notices ss about the use of In order to/So as to - T asks ss about the form - T calls ss to write the form on the board. - T corrects. -T gives ss some notes. - T gives ss some exercises to practice the structures above. - Ss do the exercises.. 3. People jog every day. 4. My sister goes to the post office. 5. My family went to the countryside last Sunday. 6. My daughter is studying very hard. 7. You shouldn’t drive fast. 8. You should get up earlier.. College. b. have good health. c. protect your eyes from the sunlight. d. help your Mom before going to school. e. avoid accidents. f. buy some stamps and envelopes. g. visit our grandparents. h. buy herself a new television.. Answer: 1. c (to) 2. h (in order to) - T calls ss to go to the board to do the 3. b (to) exercises. 4. f (in order to) - T corrects. 5. g (to) 6. a (so as to) 7. e (so as to) 8. d (to) IV. Rewrite the sentences, using the adjective + to – infinitive structure 1. I passed all the exams. I am happy. 2. Keeping people from littering is very difficult. 3. She must empty the kitchen garbage. She is not please. Answer: 1. I am happy to pass all the exams. 2. It’s difficult to keep people from littering. 3. She is not please to empty the kitchen garbage. V. Rewrite the sentences, using the adjective + noun clause 1. My class won the first prize in collecting cans. My teacher feels pleased. 2. The rivers are becoming heavily polluted. We are worried. 3. The Y&Y is having a plan on recycling.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span> used paper. I am very glad. Answer: 1. My teacher feels pleased that my class won the first prize in collecting cans. 2. We are worried that the rivers are becoming heavily polluted. 3. I am glad that the Y&Y is having a plan on recycling used paper..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span> Preparing date : 19/2/2012 Teaching date:20/2/2012 THE THIRD ENGLISH TEST Period :73 Class :a1-6 I. Objectives: Teacher checks students’ knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11 II. Matrix:. Chủ đề I. Language focus. Nhận biết TN TL 10 5đ. II. Reading. Thông hiểu TN TL. Vận dụng TN TL. 4 2.0đ. III. Writing. 6 3.0đ. Tổng 10 5.0đ 4 2.0 đ 6 3.0đ. III. Content: Prepositions Passive voice Tenses Skills : listening, reading ,write I- LANGUAGE FOCUS. Choose the best option to complete the sentences.( 5Ms) 1. Dalat is in .................. province. a. Nha Trang b. Lam Dong c. Hue 2. It’s difficult ............................ this question . a. to answer b. answer c. answering. d. Quang Nam d. answered.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span> 3. Would you mind ............................. for a few minutes? a. to wait b. wait c. waiting d. be waiting 4. Do you mind if I .......................... here? a. sitting b. to sit c. sit d. sat 5. Look! I can see a boy ...................... a water buffalo. a. ride b. riding c. to ride d. rode 6. Would you mind If I ..................... a photo? a. take b. took c. taking d. to take 7. Milk ............................... to the houses by the milkman every day. a. brings b. is bring c. is brought d. has brought 8- Cool the burns immediately so as to …………………….. tissue damage. a- ease b- relieve c- minimize d- maximize 9- She promises she ……………… back in about half an hour. a- will be b- is c- be d- may 10. It’s ......................to find a modern hotel in this town. a. difficult b. more difficult c. difficultly d. most difficult II. Reading :. It was the first time Jim went to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents. When the plane landed at Tan Son Nhat Airport, the day was fine. There was a bright sun, and the sky was cloudless and blue. It is said that Ho Chi Minh City is the city of sunshine. The family took a taxi to the Rex Hotel, a very big hotel in the city center. After checking in, they went upstairs to their room on the fifth floor. Jim was eager to see the sight of the city. Through the window of the bed room, he could see the beautiful picture of Ho Chi Minh City. It was marvelous to see the city sparking in colorful lights at night. Jim visited many places of interest such as Nha Rong Harbor, Dam Sen Park, Suoi Tien, and Saigon Water Park. Ho Chi Minh City is famous for shopping malls. Jim bought plenty of souvenirs for his friends at Saigon Tourist Trade Center. The next evening the whole family walked along the streets, and then came into a well-known vegetarian restaurant to enjoy delicious food. It was really wonderful. B- Answer the questions: (2.0Ms) 1- Where did the family take a taxi? .................................................................................................................................. .. 2- Was Jim eager to see the sight of the city? .................................................................................................................................. .. 3- Where did Jim buy plenty of souvenirs for his friends? .................................................................................................................................. .. 4- Did Jim visit many places of interest? .................................................................................................................................. .. III. Writing : Rewrite each sentence so that the meaning stays the same: (3m )\.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span> 1. Can I close the windows ? Do you mind If I.................................................................................................? 2. May I ask you a question ? Would you mind if I ..........................................................................................? 3. I will repair your bicycle tomorrow. Your bicycle......................................................................................................... 4. Will you turn down the TV, please? Do you mind ......................................................................................................? 5. People speak English all over the world. English………………………………………………………………………… 6. He works all days .He wants to buy a new house. He ………………………………………………………………………………. Preparing date :19/2 /02 unit 12: a vacation abroad Teaching date :21/2 /02 Period 74 getting started listen and read class: 8a1-6. A/ The aims and objectives: 1.The aims : By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to know some countries ,practice listening and reading for details about making .accepting and declining invitation 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: : Present progressive tense, Simple future tense b. Skills: listening, speaking, reading,. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s:-Text books, lesson plan, posters . 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)- Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up and warm up(5’) - Guessing game ( Getting started ) - Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to guess what country it is . a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan + Chatting : T :Where do you want to visit among these countries? Ss: III. New lesson:. Teacher’s activities A/Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words .. T 4’. Ss’ activities.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span> +. Pre – teach Vocabulary : - tour (n)chuyến du lịch - business meeting :buổi họp về kinh doanh (example) - to pick sb up : đón ai đó… (explanation) - abroad (adv ) :ở nước ngoài (example) -ticket (n) ;ve * Checking Vocabulary : Rub out and remember 6’ + True / False Prediction - Set the scene “ Mrs Quyen is going to the USA for a vacation . She is ringing her friend , Mrs Smith , to tell her about the trip . “ - Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the statements a. Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in San Francisco . b. Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her husband to stay with her while they are in town . c. Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs Smith,s place for dinner one night . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false . - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board . B/ While – reading 16’ +Checking predictions : -ask Ss to open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue . - Call on some Ss to correct the false statements . 1. False 2. True 3. False + Comprehension Questions - Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the questions - Let Ss compare their answers with their partner. - Call on some Ss to answer - Give feedback and correct Answer key : a) No , they won,t . Because they are coming on a tour , and their accommodation is included in the ticket price , so they will stay at the hotel . b) No , he won,t . Because he will have a business meeting in the evening that day . c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel . d) No,she isn’t e,yes ,he is - Get Ss to copy . + Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen ,s schedule. - Teacher – Ss - Repeat in chorus, individual. - Copy down. - Whole class - Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false . - Some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board .. - Pair work - Teacher – Ss - Whole class - Pair work - Give their prediction and then check . - Copy down. - Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs to complete the grid with the information taken from the dialogue . - Some Ss to go to the board to write the.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span> - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs to complete the grid with the information taken from the dialogue . - Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the information in the grid on the board . 5’ C/ Post – reading : Grammar Awareness - Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the statements indicating the following situations +Making a complaint He is always working S +tobe +always +V-ing 1-Nam’s mother /watch /tv 2-Nam’s sisters /listen/to music 3-Nam’s brothers /play /football 4- nam’s father /work/on the farm IV) Consolidation (2’): - What have you studied about to day? V) Homework (1’): - Asks students to learn by heart the lesson. - Prepare new lesson Preparing date :19/2/2012 Teaching date :22/2 /2012 Period 75 Class: 8a 1-6. - Ss to look at their books and answer the questions - Individual - Ss compare their answers with their partner - Pair work. unit 12: a vacation abroad speak. A/ The aims and objectives: 1.The aims : By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to understand the tourism advertisement and talk about their plans for a trip abroad using questions with shall/should 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: : shall/should b. Skills: speaking. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s:-Text books, lesson plan, posters . 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)- Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up *warm up(5’) JUMBLED WORDS 1. N w e y k o r ->New York 2. W s h a n g i t n o ->Washington 3. L s o A g n e e l s ->Los Angeles 4. C o h i c g a ->Chicago III. New lesson: Teacher’s and ss’ activities T. Content.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span> T presents new words -T uses the situations, explanation, realia to explain the meaning -Ss copy down. 6’. *Pre-teaching - itinerary(n)[ai'tinərəri :hành trình -art gallery ( n ) : phòng trưng bày tranh - gym (n) phòng tập thể dục - sightseeing (n) cuộc tham quan -rate per night :giá phòng qua đêm * Slap the board - Checking technique slap the board 10’ *Pre-speaking -T asks Ss to read in chorus (2 A: Where shall we stay ? roles ) and then change the role B : The Revere Hotel is expensive but it -Ss work in pairs has a gym -T corrects A: What time should we leave Los -ask ss to complete the itinerary Angeles ? -ss complete the itinerary B : There ‘s a daily flight at 10 a.m . Would that be OK ? The itinerary Depart Los Angeles : Flight 835 at 10 on Monday Arrive Boston : at 4.00 Accommodation : Atlantic Hotel . Sightseeing : Boston University , Museum & Art galleries . Depart Boston : Flight 710 at 10.00 on 10’ Thursday , 22 * While- speaking From Los Angeles To Boston (+ 3 -T gives Ss a form of itinerary hours ) T asks Ss to work in pairs Days Departure Arrival Flight Via ( interview ) Mon-Sun 1.00 18.00 45 Detroit, - Ss give feedback Philadelphia - T corrects Such as: s1: Which flight do you choose? S2: Flight 45 at 11.00 s1: What time does it arrive Boston? S2: At 18.00 s1: Where do you stay? S: Atlantic Hotel s1: Which places do you visit? 10’ S: Museums and art galleries. *Post-speaking from HCM city To Ha Noi Days Departure Arrival Flight Ask ss to make survey Mon-Sunday 6.00 10.00 750 Ss work in pair Wed- Sun 16.00 20.00 32 New Century hotel tell:048453 - Ss report their partners ‘s itinerary Rate per night :200VND-300VND Facilities :restaurants ,swimming pool ,gym.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span> - T checks by asking ss. *EX : Is that right? Royal hotel tell:048777 Rate per night :400VND-500VND Facilities :restaurants ,swimming -pool. Tourist information -Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum -water park Viet nam national university. IV Consolidation: T asks Sts to write down their plans. 5. Homework: -learn by heart the new words - Prepare Unit 12: Read.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span> Preparing date : 25/2/2012 Teaching date : 27/2/2012 UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Period 76 LISTEN Class : 8a1-6 I. Objectives: Practice in listening to the weather forecast for information about the weather in big cities in the world . II. Language contents: 1. Grammar: Present/Future simple tense (review) III. Techniques: network , brainstorm , chatting , gap fill . IV. Teaching aids: Pictures, tape , transparency , flash cards … V. Procedures: 1. Greeting and Taking attendance 2. Review of the previous lesson: 3. New lesson:. Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content T asks Ss some questions to lead in Pre-listening: the lesson Brainstorm : hot -T asks the questions degree - Ss answer the questions - T gives marks Words related to the weather forecast. wet. cool. cloudy humid dry Chatting : 1. Have you ever listened to the weather forecast on TV or on the radio ? 2. What does it often tell you about ? -T put the gap fill table on the board ( weather & temperature ) - T uses the cassette 3. Do you think it’s necessary to listen to the.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span> - Ss listen to the tape twice -Ss complete the box - T corrects if necessary - Ss compare their answers - T corrects if necessary. Answer some questions weather and temperature -Ss work in pairs -Ss answer the questions -T give feedback. weather forecast ? Why / Why not ? 4. What do you know about the high and the low temperature ? ( It refers to the lowest and highest temperature degrees in a day ) *While – listening Gap fill : Temperature city weather low high Sydney Dry, windy 20 26 about Tokyo Dry, windy 15 22 London Humid , -3 7 cold Bangkok Warm ,dry 24 32 New Windy, 8 15 York cloudy Paris Cool ,dry 10 16 *Post-listening .Answer some questions about weather and temperature A. What ‘s the weather like in Sydney today B. It will be dry and windy A . How about the temperature ? B. The low will be 20 and the high 26 degrees.. 4. Consolidation: *Ss write weather forecast using the information above 5. Homework: -Write–it-up –Use the information in the table to write a weather report , beginning with .“ Here is today ‘s weather forecast for the international travelers ”. Class 8a1-6 Period 77 Correct the test a. the aims.: By the end of lesson, Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt and know how to improve their knowledge of English. b. contents. 1. Answer key. I. 1.b 2.a 3.c 4.b 5. b 6.c II. 1. broken. 2. am glad 3.turned on 4.punishing 5. opening the window 6.finished. III. 1. helping 2. got 3. made 4. talking IV. 1. Would you mind turning off the TV? 2. A new house will be built there. 2. Results. Mark: 9-10 7-8 5-6 3-4 0-2 Class:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span> 8a1 8a2 8a3 8a4 8a5 8a6 3. Draw experiences. - Good points: some Ss studied hard and prepare for the test well - Bad points: some Ss are very lazy. - tenses. - reading c. home work - - Learn all of structures.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span> Preparing date :3/3/13 unit 12: a vacation abroad Teaching date :4/3/13 Period 78 read A. The aims and requests: - Help ss readthe information about the places of interrest in the World. - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to obtain some knowledge about some scenic sports in the USA. - Developing skill: reading. B .Preparation: + T: Textbooks, pictures , lesson plan. + Ss: textbook, notebook, pen… C. Steps of the lesson: I. Organizaton(1’): - Greeting and checking attendance. - Ask: Who’s absent to day? II. Checking up + warm up (5’): * Braintorm : What do people do when traveling ? (Ex: take photos, visit places of interest, eat specialities, go swimming, go fishing, climb mountain, go camping, go shopping, buy souvenirs,… * Form of checking: speaking. * T corrects and gives them marks. III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Ss’activities I. Pre - teach: T elicits some new words; 5’ - vocalno (n): nui lửa picture - Listen to the T. - lava (n): dung nham, nham thạch explanation - Repeat in chorus, - wharf (n): cầu cảng , cầu tầu picture individually. - valley (n): thung lũng example - Copy down. - (to) carve : chạm, khắc example - (to) pour : đổ ra mime - wine-growing(a): trồng nho làm rượu translation - prison (n): nhà tù exaplanation * Check vocabulary: Ro and Rm. - Rewrite words. II. Read – p.116 , 118 - T introduces: today we will know what Mrs Quyen did 5’ and saw in some places she came..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span> A/ Pre – reading: Pre questions: - Predict the a. What did Mrs Quyen see in her tour ? answers. b. How did Mrs Quyen go to Kilauea Volcano? c. What did special about Mount Rushmore / - Individually . d. What is the other name of Chicago? - T asks ss to think of the qs and guess the answers. - Gets feedback. B/ While – reading: 10’ 1.T asks ss to open the book and look at the pictures , then read the text to check their predictions. - Read the text and - T gets feedback: Answer key: check their a. She saw Kilauea Volcano , Lake Michigan, the heads of predictions four American presidents…. individual. b. She went there by plane. c. There is a picture of Mount Rushmore where the heads of four American presidents are carved into the rock. d. “The Windy City”. - T asks ss to work in pairs to answer the qs on p.118 part b, e. - T gets feedback : Answers: - Work in pairs to b. She saw the famous prison on the Island of Alcatraz. practice asking and e. She went shopping 8’ answering the qs. 2. Grid: - T asks ss to copy the grid and read the postcards from Mrs Quyen to her children and fill in the gaps with the - Do individually. information taken from them.. place What see did and saw a. Hawaii - went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano b. New York Went shopping, bought lots of souvenirs c. Chicago Saw Lake Michigan d. Mount Saw the heads of four American Rushmore presidents. e.San Visited Fisherman’s Wharf, the Napa Francisco Valley wine-growing area and the 8’ Alcatraz prison. - Call on some ss to go to the bb and write the information in the grid. - Read the passage C/ Post- reading: Gap-fill: again and do this - Ask ss to complete the paragraph: exercise individual. Mrs Quyen and her husband visited many places of interest in the USA while they were there. First, they (1) went - Compare with swimming at Wakiki beach (2) arrived on the Hawaiian their partner. island of (3) Oahu. There they coukd see the (4) Lava pouring out of the Kilauea (5) vocalno when they flew (6) overhead. They also saw the heads of four American Presidents (7) carved into the rock of Mount Rushmore..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span> - T gets feedback - Ss’answer. - Listen and copy. IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main points: What have you learnt? - T guides ss to do ex III on p70,71 in the Workbook. V.Home work: - Learn by heart all the vocabulary. - Do exercise in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: . + T: lesson plan, textbook, key of the test. Preparing date:3/3/13 Teaching date:5/3/13 Class 8a1-5 Unit 12: A Vacation abroad Period 79 lesson 4: WRite A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:To get Ss to practice in writing a postcard. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: Ss will be able to write postcards to their friends about their trip b. Skills:Writing B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5'). 1.Where did Mrs Quyen and her husband spend their holiday ? 2.Who did they visit when they were in the U.S.A ? 3. What did they see on the Mount Rushmore ? 4. What did Mrs Quyen buy ? 5. What did she send to her children from the U.S.A ? 1. In the U.S.A 2. The Smiths 3. The heads of 4 American Presidents 4. lots of souvenirs 5. Postcards ) III. New lesson (35'). Teacher's activities 1.Pre - writing: Gap – fill Exercise 1 on page 118 1. in 2.people 3.weather 4. visited 5. her 6. nice/happy 7. bought 8. for 9. heaviness 10. soon. T Students' activities 10 - Listen and repeat in chorally, ' individually..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span> Grid : Information needed to write a postcard - What do you write about the place? - ………………………….. weather? 2. While – writing: - Set the scene - Write the postcard *Grid : Place We're having a wonderful time in the U.S.A How do you The people are very feel about the friendly people ? Weather The weather has been warm and sunny Who you I visit my friend, meet/visit Sandra Smith What you see (no information) What you buy I bought a lot of souvenirs 3.Post - writing: correction. IV. Consolidation (2') retell main points. V. Homework: (1'). - write individuallly. 15 '. - Correct their mistakes *Answer key Dear Hoa I’m having a really good time 10 in Ha Noi, the capital of ' VietNam. The people are hospitable and helpful. The weather has been wonderful: cool and sunny. In Ha Noi, I visited some of my old friends, Trang and Hung. It was very nice to see them. We visited the History Museum and some art galleries in Hang Bai street and had lunch together at a vegetarian restaurant. I bought a lot of souvenirs and postcards for you and other friends..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span> Write their postcard in their notebooks. Preparing date9/3/13 Teaching date:11/3/13 Class 8a1-5 Unit 12: A Vacation abroad Period 80 LANGUAGE FOCUS A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:Practice in Past progressive and Present progressive tenses with “always”. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: Ss will be able to talk about activities using the Present and Past Progressive tenses b. Skills:listening, speaking, reading, and Writing B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5'). Say what the people in the pictures are doing 1. take a shower 4.write a letter 2. eat dinner 5.walk with a dog 3. read book 6. talk to grandma III. New lesson (35'). Teacher's activities 1. Presentation 1 Set the scene: Look at picture ! what was Ba doing at 8 o’clock last night? - Model sentence: Ba was talking a shower at 8 o’clock last be v_ing night - Form: was/ were + v_ing - use: to indicate an action that was in progress at a point of time in the past 2.Practice: Ba / take a shower. Time Students' activities 7' - Listen and write down.. 8'. - work invididually. Ba was taking a shower at.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span> Hoa / have dinner Bao / read a book Nga / write a letter Na / walk with her dog Lan and her grandma / talk to each other. 7' 3. Presentation: (language focus 2) Matching Look at the pictures then match the half – sentences in column A to those in column B Model sentence: The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came Concept check: 8' - Form: Main clause Con adv clause S.P When S.past While P.C - Use sequence of tenses: An action was talking place in the past when another action took place ->Key to LF2: a-C b-F c-E d-B e-D f-A 4. Production: (picture drill) 5' Model sentence : Bao is always forgetting his homework be adv V-ing The present progressive tense with“always” The progressive tenses are used with always to express a habitual action( usually bad habit as a complaint) -> Key :. eight o’clock last night. Hoa was having breakfast at eight o’clock last night. Bao was doing exercises at eight o’clock last night. Nga was writing at eight o’clock last night Na was walking at eight o’clock last night Lan was talking with her mother at eight o’clock last night. - write individually ->Key to LF2: a-C b-F c-E e-D f-A. d-B. - work in groups b. Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella c. Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus d. Nam is always watching T.V late f. Na is always talking on the phone g. Liem is always going out.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span> IV. Consolidation (2') retell main points. V. Homework: (1') Write their postcard in their notebooks. Preparing date:10/3/13 Teaching date: 12/3/12 Class 8a1-5 Unit 13: festivals Period 81 getting started listen and read A. The aims and Objectives : 1. The aims:By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to know some festivals in Viet Nam”. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: passive voice. b. Skills:listening, speaking, reading, and Writing B. Preparation. 1. Teacher's: Lesson plan, poster 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C. Procedures I. Organization: (2').Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up(5'). : Chatting 1.Tom likes swimming and sunbathing. Where should he go ? Why ? 2. David is interested in ancient cities ? 3.Huckleberry likes mountain-climbing? 4. Oliver is keen on pottery ? 5. Robinson is fond of crowed places ? * Form of checking: writing and speaking. * T corrects and gives them marks. III. New lesson (35'). Teacher’s activities. I-Vocabulary: T elictis the new words - fetch (v) ®i lÊy, mang vÒ - yell (v) hÐt to cæ vò - urge (v) thóc giôc - rub (v) xo¸ - participate (v) tham gia - award (v) tÆng thëng - teamate (n) đồng đội - competition (n) cuéc tranh tµi. T. Ss’activities. 7’ ( translation) (example) ( explanation) (mime) (explanation) ( explanation) (translation) (translation). - Listen to the T. - Repeat in chorus, individually. - Copy down..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span> - judge (n) Gi¸m kh¶o (translation) * What and where. II- Listen and read : P.121 - Pre- questions: 14’ - T sets the scene : Ba invites his friend Liz to a - Play game in 2 teams tranditional festival in the North of VN. Do you know what kind of festival it is ? - Listen. 1.How many competitions in the rice-cooking festival? - Answer the t’s qs. 2. Do all team members go to the river to fetch water? Rice-cooking festival Water fetching Fire making Rice-cooking To fetch water To make fire To cook rice - Ask ss to read the statements ex2 on p.122 and check (v) the boxes , using the information in the dialogue. - T gets feedback. * Answers: a. F-> one preson each team take part in the water fetching contest. b. F-> one person has to collect one water bottle. c. T d, F-> pieces of bamboo are used to make the fire. e. F -> in the final contest, the judges taste the rice. f. T * Matching :. Mét mÈu tre The grand prize trÊu The starting position Vá Gi¶i nhÊt The husk Chủ tịch hội đồng giám khảo §iÓm xuÊt ph¸t a piece of bamboo The council leader C - Talk about the rice cooking festival: - Three competions - The way to fetch the water to cook rice - The way to make fire - The rice cooking contest - The way to decide the winner of the contest. - Do individually. - Give their predictions. - Copy down.. 5’. - Individual work. 10’ Ss guess the meaning of the words of phrases by matching.. … IV- Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson: What have you learnt ? V- Homeworks : - Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period: + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster. + Ss : homework, text book , pen. - Free talk in pairs or in groups about the rice cooking festival.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span> Preparing date:10/3/13 Teaching date:14/3/13 Class 8a1-5 Unit 13: festivals Period 82 speak A. The Aims and objectives: 1. The aims: Practice in talking about preparations, Practice listening for details about preparing for Tet 2. Objective: a. Language focus: Talk about their preparations for a special event, listen about their preparations for a special event b. Skills: speaking. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, word cues 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) T: give instructions ask Ss to think of five things they often prepare for Tet and write them down on a piece of paper. Suggestions: - Decorate / clean / paint the house / the room / the yard.......... III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities I-speaking 1-Pre- speaking: Pre – teach vocabulary: - tidy (V): don dep - Pomegranate ( Viet Namese ) quả lựu - tailor(N): tho may -Peach blossoms ( Viet Namese ) hoa đào -marigold ( Viet Namese ) hoa vạn thọ -Dried watermelon seeds hạt dưa. Time Students’ activities 10’ - Listen and repeat.. - Order in pairs..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span> -Spring rolls ( Viet Namese ) đồn chả Ordering: A–F C–H D–J B–G E–I 1. While- speaking: (Mapped dialogue) Mrs Quyen Lan A. You / tidies / 1. Yes / where / bedroom? going? B. Market / have 2. Could / to / oranges / collect / new Ao pomegranates Dai tailor / corner 2. Production: (speak 2) - a school festival Hang; have you swept the classroom? Tam: Yes, I have. Where are you going, Hang? Hang: To the market. I have to buy some color papers and some fruits. Tam: Could you buy me some juice cans? Hang: Sure, I will. Tam: Thanks, Hang. Is there anything else you want me to sweep? Hang: Not really. But I want our classroom to look nice at the festival. Tam: ok. I know what to do now. We will decorate all the windows. Hang: That’s a good ideal. Bye Tam: Bye, Hang. II-lisening 1. While – listening : Listen to the dialogue Answer key a. Mr Robinson/ flower market b. traditional c. dried watermelon seeds d. make Give the answer and check if Ss’ guesses are right or not 2. Post – listening:. 10’ - Practice in pairs.. 15’. - write their ideals - Practice in pairs. - Go to the board and slap.. - Listen and write down.. Things to do. Mr Robinson Mrs Robinson Liz. -go to the flower market to buy peach blossom and a bunch of marigolds - Go to Mrs Nga’s to learn how to make spring rolls - Go to the market to buy some candies and a packet of dried watermelon seeds.. - Listen again and write down..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span> IV. Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’): - Practice again the dialogue at home. - Prepare new lesson : reading. Preparing date:16/3/13 Teaching date:18/3 /13 Class 8a1-5 Unit 13: festivals Period 83 listen A. The Aims and objectives: 1. The aims: Practice listening for details about preparing for Tet 2. Objective: a. Language focus: listen about their preparations for a special event b. Skills: listening . B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, wordcues. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) T: give instructions ask Ss to think of five things they often prepare for Tet and write them down on a piece of paper. Suggestions: - Decorate / clean / paint the house / the room / the yard.......... III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities I-listening 1-Pre- listening Pre – teach vocabulary: - tidy (V): don dep - Pomegranate ( Viet Namese ) quả lựu -Peach blossoms ( Viet Namese ) hoa đào -marigold ( Viet Namese ) hoa vạn thọ -Dried watermelon seeds hạt dưa -Spring rolls ( Viet Namese ) đồn chả Ordering: A–F C–H D–J B–G E–I 1 pre – listening :. Time Students’ activities 10’ - Listen and repeat.. - Order in pairs.. 10’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span> Ask ss to predict the sentences to fill the missing 2- while –listening Ask ss to listen to the tape 2 times and check their prediction ,the compare the answers with a partner -call ss to answer the question Ask ss to listen again and correct 15’ Answer key a. Mr Robinson/ flower market b. traditional c. dried watermelon seeds d. make Give the answer and check if Ss’ guesses are right or not 2. Post – listening: Ask ss to fill the gaps with the information taken from the statements above Things to do. Mr Robinson Mrs Robinson Liz. -go to the flower market to buy peach blossom and a bunch of marigolds - Go to Mrs Nga’s to learn how to make spring rolls - Go to the market to buy some candies and a packet of dried watermelon seeds.. Further Ask ss to k in group and talk about the preparation for tet. Ss predict - listen Give the keys Check again. - write their ideals - Practice in pairs. fill the gaps with the information taken from the statements above. work in group and talk about the preparation for tet. IV. Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’): - write a short paragraph about your family’s preparations for Tet - Prepare new lesson : reading.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span> Preparing date:19/3/13 Teaching date:21/3/13 Class 8a1-5 Period 84. Unit 13: festivals lesson 3:read. A. The Aims and objectivves: 1. The aims: Reading for details about Christmas .2. Objective: a. Language focus: . get some knowledge about Christmas. b. Skills: Reading. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Chatting : 1. When is Christmas held every year ? (December 24th ) 2. Do you celebrate Christmas ? III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities 1) Pre- teach the vocabulary (to) spread :trải ra (to) spread – spread – spread Christmas carol: ( picture ) bài hát noel Patron saint : ( Viet Namese ) thánh bảo hộ jolly : ( happy and cheerful ) (adj ) vui vẻ (to) decorate : ( mime) trang tri Santa Claus : ( picture ) ông gia Noel. * Matching: 1)Christmas Caro 2) Christmas card 3) Santa Claus 4) Christmas tree. T Students’ activities 8’ - Listen to the teacher and repeat in chorally and individually.. 7’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span> a- also (Father Christmas) man with a white beard and dressed in red b- evergreen or artificial tree decorated with light at Christmas c- greeting cards sent to friends at Christmas d- a Christmas song of jolly * Answer key: 1. d 2. c 3. a 4. b 2. While - reading: Read the paragraphs on page 124 – 125 Check if Ss’ answers are right or not Christmas Place of Specials origin The Christmas Riga tree) The Christmas ( England ) Card ) Christmas Carol ( No information ) ( Santa Claus ) USA. Date ( early 1500s). - work in pairs.. 1 0’ - Work individually.. mid- 19 th century ( 800 years ago ) (1823). Complete the table (Ex1 p. 126) 3. Post - reading: Answer the questions (ex2 p. 126) 1. More than a century ago 2-He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends - Work in groups. 3-800 years ago 1 4-An American professor named Clement 0’ Clarke Moore 5-On the description of Saint Nicholas in professor Moore’s poem IV. Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’) Write-it-up : Use the information in the grid to write the brief paragraphs. Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook Be ready lesson 4 “ Write ”.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span> Preparing date:19/3/13 Teaching date: 21/3/13 Class 8a1-5 Unit 13: festivals Period 85 lesson 4:write A. The Aims and objectivves: 1. The aims: To get Ss to practice in writing a report. 2. Objective: a. Language focus: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a report b. Skills: Writing. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Brainstorm: 1. How many people are there in the picture? 2. Name all the things in the picture III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities 1. Pre – writing: Gap fill Answer key 1. Rice – cooking 6. traditional 2. one / a 7. bamboo 3. Water – fetching 8. six 4. run 9. separate 5. water 10. added * Understanding questions : 1. What does this report show? 2. Where was it held ? 3. How many competitions were there ? 4. What do each team do in each contest. t 10’. Students’ activities. - Work individually.. - answer questions.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span> 5. How was the festival ? 1. Name of the festival 2. Where was it held ? 3. How long did it last ? 4. Activities, competitions ? 5. How were the activities organized ? 6. How many people took part in each activity ? 7. What did you think about the festival ? 2. While –writing: 15’ Questions and answers (ex2 on p. 127) Eg: This report shows how the school festival - write individually was held The festival was held in the schoolyard. There were two competitions: volleyball and jug of war In the volleyball game, the were six students in each team and each class had a volleyball team. The played against each other and the 9G team had most points got the grand prize. There were ten students who took part in the jug of war Each class had a team and the 9B team 10’ won all the others got the first prize. The school festival was wonderful. it made - listen and check their mistakes all the students love their school and study better. 3. Post – writing: Present the report on a festival on the board IV. Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’) - Let students do the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span> Preparing date:24/3/13 Teaching date:25/3/13 Class 8a1-5 Period 86. Unit 13: festivals lesson 5:language focus. A. The Aims and objectivves: 1. The aims: Practice in reporting what was said and further practice in using passive forms 2. Objective: a. Language focus: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use reported speech and the passive in the past , present and future tense b. Skills: Writing. B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Infinitive Past participle Put put Write written Hold held Make made Break broken III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation: A Tense 1. Present simple 2. Past simple 3. Future simple 4. Present perfect. B Form a. was / were + past participle b. have / has been + past participle c. is / am / are + past participle d. will / shall be + past participle. T 5’. Students’ activities - match individually..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span> a. b. c.. a. b. c.. call Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy * Answer keys : 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b 2.Practice: Gap- fill * Language focus 1: have Ss fill in the gaps with the right form of the verbs in the box Answer keys : were performed d. will be held was decorated / put e. was awarded is made f. was written * Language focus 2: 1. jumbled 2. broken 3. broken 4. scattered 5. pulled * Language focus 3: A fire- making contest d. A flowerarranging contest A bull- fighting Festival e. A rice- exporting country A car-making industry f. A clothes- washing machine * Language focus 4: direct speech Reported speech Present simple will must This tomorrow now yesterday here today ago . Past simple would had to That the next/ following day Then the previous day / the day before there that day before. IV. Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’) -Let Ss do the exercises in the work book. - Work individually 8’. - give the correct form 7’. - work in pairs 7’. 8’. write down do the exercise b. He said he could fix the faucets c. He said the pipes were broken d. He said new pipes were very expensive e. He said Mrs Thu had to pay him then.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span> Preparing date:31/3/13 Teaching date:1/4//13 Class 8a1-5 Period 87. REVISION. A/ The aims: 1.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using Passive form : be + past participle and Reported speech , and revising compound words and reported statements. 2. objectives : all structure grammar and do exercises of unit 13 - Develop Ss’ four skills. B Preparation: Text books, lesson plan, posters .. C/ Steps of the lesson: I. Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance. II. Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue. - Two others to retell the main structure grammar . - Teacher corrects and give them marks. III. New lesson:. *** I/ 1.. * GRAMMAR: * Passive form: Be + Past participle Matching:. Tenses Form 1. Present simple a. Was/were + V.pp 2. Past simple b. Have/has been + V.pp 3. Future simple c. Is/are/am + V.pp 4. Present perfect d. will/shall be + V.pp * Compound nouns : A rice cooking festival (V-ing) (noun) **** (article)(noun) - To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing 2. * Reported speech : Model sentences : He said "I'm a plumber" ->direct speech He said he was a plumber -> reported speech Changes: 1. Tenses: Direct speech Indirect-reported speech. Individual. Teacher – Ss Work with a partner Pair work - Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures to put.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span> II/. present simple past simple will / must / can would / had to / could 2.Pronouns: Depend on the Subject of the main clause 3. Advs of time: This that / now then / here there today that day / tomorrow the next day Yesterday the day before / ago before Have Ss copy Read the following passage and choose the item (a, b, c, or d) that best answers each of the questions about it. Hi! I’m Dean. I’m from England. My favorite time of the year is Christmas, which is on 25 December. That’s when Christians celebrate the birth of Christ. In the middle of December we send a lot of cards to our friends and family, here and abroad. Then we get a big tree and decorate it with lights and other things. On Christma Day, we give each other presents. We have one enormous meal with turkey, and after that, we have Christmas pudding. 1. When is Christmas held? a. On 25 December / b. In the middle of December c. In the middle of the year / d. no information 2.Christmas is held because Christians want to__. a. have a good time/ b. celebrate the birth of Christ c. visit their friends and family / d. decorate big trees 3. What does the word ‘decorate’ in line 5 mean? a. make something look nicer/ b. paint something c. make something look worse / d. buy something 4. On Christmas Day, people_____ . a. give each other presents / b. have an enormous meal with turkey / c. have Christmas pudding d. all are correct 5. Which of the following is not true? a. Dean is English. b. At Christmas, people get big trees and decorate it. c. Dean prefers Halloween to Christmas. d. In the middle of December, people send a lot of Christmas cards to their friends and family. *Work with a partner - Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary - Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box - Get some Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct.. them in the correct order according to theinstructions - Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form Pair work. Teacher – Ss Individual Whole class. Pair work. Teacher – Ss Whole class Ss to read the letter and match the words Individual Ss to give their answers Read the letter aloud Ss to read the complete letter aloud Listen and copy ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box work in pairs..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span> - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud . * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson. * Homework : 1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents are delighted that he passed his English exam ……” 2. Do the exercises in the workbook . Preparing date : 31/3/13 Teaching date : 2/4/13 Period 88 Test( no 4 ) class: 8a1-5. A/ The aims: Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 12 to unit 14 so that they can supplement what they are short of . (to do the test well ). B / Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson . I. choose the best answering (3ms) 1. Who was you.....................on the telephone when I came in? A. talk B. talking C. to talk D. talked 2. Ha Long bay............................ as a world heritage site by UNESCO. A. recognizes B. recognized C. is recognized D. was recognized 3. Would you ..............................giving me some information about Singapore tours? A. mind B. like C. know D. interest 4. The cartoon character Mickey Mouse.............................. by Walt Disney A. created B. is created C. was created D. was creating 5. Singing contest ............................ in our schoolyard tomorrow afternoon. A. is held B. will be held C. was held D. is holding 5 Ngan asked me ................. Ha long Bay was in Northern Viet Nam. A. as B. if C. so D. that II/ Supply the correct verb form (2ms) 1) Hoa …………………….(go) to Da Lat last summer. 2) My bike ……………………… (make) in Japan in 2001 3) When I came , she ………………………….(do) her homework. 4) She told me how …………………….. (go) there. III Fill in the blank with one suitable preposition : of / in / on / for (2ms) 1) My mother is very keen ……………………..growing roses. 2) John is extremely fond …………………….music. 3) Are you interested …………………….a harvest festival? 4) Thanks ………………………..your letter. IV/ Read then answer . (2ms) Viet Nam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar Calendar. It is officially known as Tet Nguyen Dan or Tet. It begins between January and February. Vietnamese people usually make preparation for the holiday several weeks beforehand. They tidy their houses, cook special food … . On the New Year’s Eve, people sit up to.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span> midnight to see the New Year in, then they put on new clothes and give one another the greetings of the season. Tet lasts ten days. 1) What is Viet Nam’s New Year known as? 2) When does the Lunar New Year begin? 3) What do Vietnamese people usually do to prepare for Tet? 4) What do people do on the New Year’s Eve? V Write reported speech (2ms) 1) Nam said “I’m a teacher” ->Nam said………….. 2)Do you mind my smoking ->Do you ……….. Preparing date:7/4/2012 Test correction Teaching date: 10/4/2012 Period 92 / The aims. 1. The aims: - T helps Ss correct some mistakes that Ss usually make while doing test. 2. Objectives: - Improve Ss’ writing skill. B. contents. I-choose the best answering each sentence is 0,5 point 1-b 2-d 3-a 5-b 6-b II-supply the correct verb 1-went 2-was made 3-was doing 4-to do III-fill in the blank with one suitable preposition 1-on 2-of 3-in 4-for IV-read then answer 1- It is officially known as Tet Nguyen Dan or Tet 2-It begins between January and February 3-They tidy their houses, cook special food 4-On the New Year’s Eve, people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, then they put on new clothes and give one another the greetings of the season. V-write report speech 1-Nam said that I was a teacher 2- do you mind if I smoke B. Results. Mark: 9-10 7-8 5-6 3-4 0-2 Class: 8a1.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span> 8a2 8a3 8a4 8a5 8a6 3. Draw experiences. - Good points: some Ss studied hard and prepare for the test well - Bad points: some Ss are very lazy. - tenses. - reading Preparing date:31/3/13 Teaching date:3/4 /13 unit 14 :wonders of the world Class 8a1-5 Period 89 getting started listen and read A. The Aims and objectives: 1. The aims:. By the end of the lesson, students will be able to seek information about a language game to complete a summary 2. Objective: a. Language focus: Question word + to-inf b. Skills: listen and read B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) a. The Pyramid b. Sydney Opera House c. Stonehenge III. New lesson (35’) Teacher’s activities. I. Vocabulary: T elicits some new words: - Clue (n) : manh mối (translation) - Rule (n) : Luật chơi (example) - wonder (n): kì quan (example) - gold gate bridge: cầu cổng vàng (translation) - clue (n): gợi ý (example 1. Presentation dialogue : (Listen and read – P.131-132) 2. Gapfill : (Listen and read 2 P.132) 1. game 2. place 3. clue 4. Vietnam 5. American 6. Gold 7. right 8. was 3. Sets the scene: " Nga , Nhi and Hoa are playing a language game. T. Ss’activities. 5’ - Copy down new lesson. - Repeat in chorus.. 5’ 5’ - Asks sts to open their books and read the dialogue on page.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span> called guessing game. How does this game work? Rearrange the statements in the right order of the game" - Puts the statements chart on the board. - Asks sts to read the statements and put them in the right order. - Calls on some pairs to go to the board and write their answers ) II. While- reading: - Sts open their books and read the dialogue on page 131, 132 while listening to the tape 1. Ordering sentences : How to play the guessing game? 1. B asks questions to find out what it is 2. A thinks of a famous person or place 3. B wins if he/she can guess the correct answer 4. A gives B a clue 5. B loses if he/she can't guess the correct answer 6. A only can answer "yes" or "no" ->Key: 2 - 4 - 1 - 6 - 3- 5 3. Grammar : Model sentences I don't know how to play it * Form: S + V + question word + to infinitive... * Use: Reduced form of an indirect question Ex: I don't know how can I play it how to play it Please tell me where I can go during the visit where to go A B Eg: I don't know how I can play it to play it III. Guessing game : Teacher: It is a wonder and it is in Asia St:(guess) Teacher : yes/ no. 131, 132 while listening to the tape - Plays the tape. - Checks if sts' guesses are right or not - Have sts to copy statements in the right order T – Ss 10’ - Students listen to the dialoge then answer the questions Groupwork of 4/5 Ss T – Ss Pair work - Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue . Individual work Ss guess the meaning of the words of phrases by matching. - Asking sts to read the summary again. 5’. IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson: What have you learnt? V. Home works: - Learnt by heart all the new words - Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period: + T; Lesson plan, pictures, textbook. + Ss: homework..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span> Preparing date: 7/4/13 Teaching date: 8/4/13 Class 8a1-5 Period 90. unit 14 :wonders of the world speak. A. The Aims and objectives: 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make a report on a famous places using reported speech - Further practice in seeking information about famous places or people using “Yes / No” questions both in “direct speech” and “indirect speech” 2. Objective: a. Language focus: Reported speech, simple past tense b.skill: speaking skill B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Who is the fastest? - Informs the topic and time limit. - Delivers posters to sts - Tells sts to put their posters on the board - Gives feedback and corrects *Write 10/15 famous world places within 3 minutes III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities I - Speak: a-pre-speaking 1. It was designed and built by the French civil engineer with 300 meters in height 2. It is in Sound Central Asia, 8,848 meters high above sea level. 3. It was built from 246- 208 BC and some people say it can be seen from the moon.. T. Ss’activities. 8’ Individual Pair work - Ss to work in pairs and give their.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span> 4. It is a bell striking the hours in the clock tower of the houses of Parliament in London. Answer key: 1. Eiffel Tower. / 2. Mount Everest 3. Great wall of china . / 4. Big Ben b.while-speaking 1. Have they just built the Eiffel Tower in Paris? 2. Is the Empire State Building located in New York city? 3. Are the Petronas Twin Towers located in Malaysia? 4. Is the Great Barrier Reef in Australia? 5. Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore? 6. Is Mount Everest in Nepal?... * Modal sentences: I said to Lan, "Is Hue citadel in the central Vietnam?" (Yes/ no questions direct speech) I asked If Hue citadel was Lan whether in the Central Vietnam * Concept check: Indirect: Yes/ No question Form: V + O + if / whether + S + V Use: - to say to ask / want to know - If the verb in the main clause is in past tense, the tense in the indirect questions must be changed: Direct question Indirect question Present simple past simple Past simple past perfect Present perfect Past perfect. answers .. 8’. 6’. Sts to write yes/no questions about 10 places in the box, using the information in the matching. ( each st in a group asks a question) - Monitors and assists sts if necessary Sts ask and answer the questions, checks yes or no -A group to demonstrate their work S: Yes, it is - Write the statement on the board. - Have sts to copy Individual Have sts work in their groups - Calls on sts in different groups to report in front of the class - Gives feedback and corrects Sets the scene: Yes no. 10’. - Is Phong Nha cave in Southern Viet Nam? - Is Petronas Twin Towers the tallest building in the world? - Is the great Barrier Reef a world Heritage Site? - Is the Empire State Building in Australia? - Is Ha Long bay a world Heritage Site? - Is Big Ben in Paris French?. . lls on some sts to resay the use of the Indirect Yes/ No question if necessary - Shows the questions on the board - Models the first question and.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span> asks sts to listen. - Student read the question, another student read the reported speech sentence. 4. Consolidation:3’ - Retell the main points of this lesson: What have you leanrt ? 5.Homeworks: 1' - Learn by heart vocabulary - Do the exercises 3, 4 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period: Preparing date7/4/13 Teaching date: 9/4/13 Class 8a1-5 Period 91. unit 14 :wonders of the world listen. A. The Aims and objectives: 1. The aims: Help ss listen the details by deliberating the mistakes. - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to recognize mistakes through listening to an advertisements. - Complete the passage. Use either the to-infinitive or the bare infinitive form of the verbs in brackets. 2. Objective: a. Language focus: to-infinitive or the bare infinitive form b.skill: listening and writing skill B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) * Chatting: Questions Places 1. Is the Great Wall in England ? No/ China 2. Is Stonehenge in England Yes 3. Is Phong Nha Cave in Vietnam Yes 4. Is Mount Everest in Nepal ? Yes 5. Is the Empire State Building in San Francisco ? No/ New York 6.Is Ha Long Bay in Southern VN? Yes 7. Is Hue Citadel a World Heritage Yes 8. Is Big Ben in France ? No/ England 9. Is Great Barrier Reef a World Heritage ? Yes 10. Is Eiffel Tower in Australia ? No/ France III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities I. Vocabulary: T elicits some new words:. T 5’. Ss’activities.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span> 1. relaxing (adj): thư giãn (translation) 2. Crystal clear (adj): trong suốt như pha lê 3. Coral (n): san hô (example) 4. (to) snorkel: bơi lặn có sử dụng ống thở 5. marine (adj); thuộc về biển, hàng hải 6, rainforest (n): rừng mưa nhiệt đới 7. North (n): Phương Bắc * Check : Slap the board. II. Listen : (p.133) A - Pre listening : 1. Correct 5 mistakes: 5’ - T sets the scene: “you are going to listen to an advertisement on the tape. There are 4 mistakes in the advertisement in your books . What are they ?”. - T asks ss to choose 5 words that they think they might appear in the advertisement. * rainforest * north * restaurant * eastern * coral * hotel - T gets feedback. 15’ B – While – listening: - T asks ss to read the advertisement in their books for a few minutes. - Then ask them to listen to the tape and correct their mistakes. - T plays the tape 3 times. - T gets some ss to give their answers , then play the tape the last time, gives feedback and correct. - T asks ss to copy. * Answer: 1, far North 2, hotel 3, rainforest 4, 6924392. - Listen and repeat in chorus, then individual. - Guess the meaning of the words. - Copy down. - Play game into 2 teams. - Listen - Individual work.. - Individual work.. - Copy the complete paragraph.. 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson: What have you leanrt ? - T guides ss to do ex 1 – p.82,83. 5.Homeworks: - Learn by heart vocabulary - Do the exercises 5 – p.87 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period: read + Lf 1. + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster. + Ss: homework, notebook.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span> Preparing date: 14/4/13 Teaching date:15/4/13 Class 8a1-5 Period 93. unit 14 :wonders of the world read. A. The Aims and objectivves: 1. The aims: Help ss read for details about the Wonders of the World. Further practice in the passive voice. - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get some knowledge about the Wonders of the World 2. Objective: a. Language focus: passive voice. b.skills: reading and writing skill B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) of the wonders of the world they have known * Brainstorm : The wonders of the world The Hanging Garden of Babylon/ Iraq The Statue of Zeus/ Greece Angkor Wat/ Cambodia The Taij Mahal/ India The Lighthouse Alexandria The Statue of Jupiter/ Greece The Actimitst's temple/ Turkey The Statue of Apollon/ Greece III. new lesson. Teacher’s activities I, Vocabulary: T elicits some new words - Compile (v) Biªn so¹n, tËp hîp - Claim (v) Khẳng định, tuyên bố. T 6’. Ss’activities - Listen and repeat in chorus, individual..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span> - Honor (v) Thê - Survive (v) Tån t¹i, sèng sãt - Guess the meaning and then copy down. - God (n) Chóa - Religious (adj) Thuéc t«n gi¸o - Royal (adj) hoµng téc, hoµng gia - Rewrite the words. * Check : Ro and Rm. II. Read (p.134): 7’ A / Pre - reading: True – False prediction: - T hangs the poster on the bb. - Ask ss to predict T or F. - Individual work. a, An Egyptian man compiled a list of what he - Possible answers: thought were the seven wonders of the world. a-T b-F c-T/F dT/F b, The only surviving wonder is the Pyramid of Chop in Egypt. - Pair compare. c, Angkor Wat was orignally built to honor a Hindu God. d, The Great Wall of China isn’t in the list of the 7 wonders of the world. - T gets feedback. 12’ B/ While – reading: 1. Ask ss to read the text on p.134 to check their predictions. - Individual work and then - Call on some ss to correct the false statements. compare with their partner. * Answer: a-F b-T c-T d-F 11’ 2. Multiple choice (p.134): - Copy the answers. - Ask ss to choose the best answers to complete the sentences. - T listens and corrects. - Ask ss to copy the right answers in their notebook. * Answer: a–C b-A c-C d-B IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson: V.Homeworks: - Learn by heart vocabulary - Do the exercises III – p.84 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period: Write. + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster. + Ss: homework, notebook,.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span> Preparing date: 14/4/13 Teaching date: 16/4 /13 Class 8a1-5 Period 94. unit 14 :wonders of the world write. A. The Aims and objectives: 1. The aims: - Help ss practice in writing a letter to a friend. - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter to a friend about a place they have visited. 2. Objective: a. Language focus: to write a letter to a friend about a place they have visited. b. skills: writing skill B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities I, Vocabulary: T elicits some new words 6’ - ranger (n): người gác công viên (explanation) - Listen and repeat in - Edge (n): rìa mép (exmple) chorus, individual. - (a) canyon: hẻm núi (explanation) - Stone age : thời kì đồ đá (example) - Guess the meaning and - inhabitant (n): cư dân (translation) then copy down. - breathtaking (adj): làm kinh ngạc (example) - temperature (adj): ôn hòa, dễ chịu (explanation) * Check : Matching. - Match the words. II. Write (p.135): A / Pre - writing: 7’ 1. Reading: Complete the letter Tin sent to Hoa. - Individual work. - Ask ss to read the letter Tim sent to Hoa about her trip to the Grand Canyon on p.135. - Tell ss to complete the letter by inserting the letters * Possible answers:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span> of the missing sentences: A , B , C, or D. 1-C 2-B 3-D 4-A - Call on some ss to read their completed letters in front of the class. - T gets feedback and corrects. - T asks ss to answer the qs: Where have they been to? -> The Grand Canyon in How long did they stay there? Arizona. What was the weather like ? -> a week What did they see there ? -> quite cool. Was Tim happy with this trip ? ->……. B/ While – writing: 18’ - T sets the scene: imagine you have visited a place - Listen and write recently, write a letter to a friend of yours and tell individually. him/ her about this place. - Ask ss to write the letter, use the prompts in ex2p135 Eg: Dear,… How are you ? I …… - T monitors and assits ss if necessary. - Read the letter aloud. - Call on some ss to read their letters in front of the class. - T gets feedback and corrects. - Pair work. Dear……, - Practice writing a letter to How are you ? I hope you and your family still has a a friend. good health and you will have a good result for your exam. - Listen and copy. My family has just return from a trip to Ha Long Bay. It is a world heritage site. We spent 5 days there and I didn’t want to leave. There are many beautiful limestone islands and magnificent caves. That’s all I have time to tell you about. What do you plan to do during the summer vaccation ? Write to me. Your friend, (Signature) 7’ C/ Post – writing : - Ask ss to share and compare with their partners. - Ask ss to wrap the books with friends and find out: * similar information and different information IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson: What have you leanrt ? - T guides ss to do ex IV – p.85,86 – W.B V.Homeworks: - Learn by heart vocabulary.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span> - Do the exercises IV – p.85,86 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period: + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster. + Ss: homework, notebook,. Preparing date: 15/4/13 Teaching date: 17/4/ 13 Class 8a1-5 Period 95. languge focus. A. The Aims and objectives: 1. The aims: To revise all the knowledge needed to the test To prepare well for the test 2. Objective: a. Language focus:grammar b. skills: writing skill B. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, poster. 2. Students: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools C. Procedures: I. Organization: (2’)Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities 1. Presentation Ss give form Ask ss to give form the grammar Form: a. Passive form * Past form: ( Widen to modal verb such as can, will, was / were + past participle coul, shall, may, must..) Reported speech b. Reported speech (Statements, yes/no questions (Statements, yes/no questions) S + asked + (O) if/whether S + V c. the tense * Notice the changes:. 2. Practice II - Language focus 2: - Asks sts to report what Nhi asked Nga, using reported speech. - Models the first question and asks sts to listen.. say asked question statement Simple present simple past Students do the exercises given by the teacher.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span> a. Do you know My Son, Nga Nhi asked Nga if / whether she knew My Son b. Nhi asked Nga if / whether it was far from Ha Noi. c. Nhi asked Nga if / whether My Son was Quang Nam province d. Nhi asked Nga if / whether Many people lived at My Son e. Nhi asked Nga if / whether Many tourists visited My Son every year f. Nhi asked Nga if / whether She wanted to visit My Son one day langua focus 3 : Model sentences I don't know how to play it * Form: S + V + question word + to infinitive... * Use: Reduced form of an indirect question Ex: I don't know how can I play it how to play it Please tell me where I can go during the visit where to go A B Eg: I don't know how I can play it to play it Language focus 4 – p.137: - T elicits the target language from ss. Eg: 1, I want to go out at the weekend. To-inf 2, She enjoys swimming very much. V-ing 3, He can speak many language. MV+ V(bare-inf) * Concept check: - Meaning : translate into Vietnamese. - Form: 1, S + V + to-inf 2, S + enjoy/ hate/start + V-ing. 3, S + model verb + bare-inf. - T asks ss to copy down, the do ex 4 – p.137. - T corrects and gives the answers: .. Ss do ex a-Nga showed nhi where to get tickets b-Nga poined out nhi where to buy souvenirs c-Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to Hoi An d-Ngha told Nhi what to do there during the visit. 1, to jog 2, go 3, to gather 4, to rain 5, to search 6, to continue 7, get.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span> IV. Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson: What have you leanrt ? V.Homeworks: Turn the passive sentences into the active in language focus 1 - Prepare well for the next period: Test 2. + T: lesson plan, test. + Ss: homework, notebook, …. Preparing date: 21/4 /2013 Teaching date: 22/4/2013. Unit 15: computer. Class 8a1-5. Period 96.. Lesson 1: getting started + listen and read. A / The aims and objectives. 1. The aims: ss study the new topic :Computers ,the benefits of the computer in daily life ,practice listening and reading to recognizes facts and opinions 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: the present perfect with already and yet b. Skills: Listening, reading B/ Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, cassette, posters. 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I. Organization : Greeting + checking member (2’) II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Brainstorming Computer can help us: Ask ss to think of the topic and express their opinions Collect ss opinions and write them on the board - Save time - Learn interestingly - learn more quickly - computer are convenient / easy for keeping / storing information - Computers are very quick in giving answers to our questions III. New lesson (35’) Teachers’ activities 1. Pre –reading: Pre – teach vocal: - Printer :máy in (picture) - manual: sach hướng dẫn (realia) - connect :(v) ket noi (realia) - guarantee (n)bảo hành (realia) - plug :phich cắm (realia). Tim e 8’. Students’ activities - Listen and repeat.. - copy down.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span> - socket :ổ cam điện (realia) 2. While - reading: 15’ Introduces about the conent of the dialogue Ask SS to open their books,read the dialogue on page 138 and listen to the tape Ask ss to practice the dialogue in pairs and explain a gain the term “fact and opinion” Fact: a thing that is known to be true, especially when it can be proved Opinion: Your feelings or thoughts about someone or something, rather than a fact Get ss to work invidual ,read the statement and check V the suitable boxes ,then compare the answer with the partner Fact or opinion: a. The printer isn’t working b. There shouldn’t be anything wrong with it c. I know how to connect a painter d. The manual isn’t very helpful e. I bought it in HCM City f. I don’t know what they can do Key: a. F b. O c. O d. F e. F f. O 10’ 3.Post – reading:* Give the way to use “the present perfect with already and yet” Give the prompts and ask ss to make sentences : a-you/do/the house work /yet? Yes. I/already wash /the clothes /,but I/not cook/the lunch yet . b-you/have dinner/yet ? c-you/call/any friends today ? yes. I/already make /three calls Correct them if necessary. IV. onsolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’): - Do the exercises on the work book on page…... -Read the dialogue in pairs - work in pairs. - work individually.. - work in pairs. Listen and copy - work in pairs.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span> Preparing date:21/4/13 Teaching date: 22/4/13. Unit 15: computer. Class 8a1-5. Period 97.. Lesson 2: Speak. A / The aims and objectives. 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and a disagreement. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: s will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and disagreement. b. Skills: speak B/ Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, posters. 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I-Organization : Greeting + checking member (2’) II-Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) - Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue of unit 13. => T corrects and give them marks. III-New lesson (35’). Teachers’ activities 1. Presentation: * Brainstorm: - Writes the topic on the board: “useful expressions to express agreement and a disagreement” Opinion I like… I don’t like I think… I feel…. I don’t believe… Agreement. So do I I agree you are right Neither do I. Students’ activities Listen and do.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span> Degree of agreement. I agree, but… Yes, but on the other hand…. I disagree Disagreement I can’t agree with you No, I think…….. 1. Reading comic books d. 2. Playing in the rain a. 3. Driving a car b. 4. Foreign food c. 2. Practice: + Picture drill: T: I think driving a car is very easy S: I disagree. I think it is difficult to drive a car or So do I. - entertaining: gi¶i trÝ, - time-consuming(n): tèn nhiÒu th× giê Suggestions: a. I disagree I think it is very easy once you get used to it or you are right, it is difficult to get used to driving in traffic. b.- Neither do I. I would rather read a mystery story - I can’t agree with you. I think they are too boring. c. - I like walking in the rain too. It feel so refreshing - I agree they look so pretty d.I agree, but if you don’t eat all the time, it won’t hurt you 3. Production: + Mapped dialogue: - Presents the dialogue and has sts to repeat sentence by sentence - Calls on one sts to demonstrate the dialogue - Open pair: IV_Consolidation (2’). Retell main points V-Homework (1’):. - Writes complete dialogues in your notebooks - Do the exercises in the workbook page….. Answer key: 1. b 2. c 4. d. 3. a. - copy down. - Practice in pairs.. Close pair: Sts make similar dialogues referring the cues on page 140 (below the dialogue) to replace the information - Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span> Preparing date:22/04/13 Teaching date:24/4/13 Class 8a1-5 Period 98. Unit 16: invention Lesson: listen. A/ The aim and objectives:. 1.The aim - Giving Ss to practice in writing about a process, using the sequence markers and Listening for details and revision of passive form 2. Objectives a. Language focus: writing about a process, using the sequence markers and Listening for details and revision of passive form b. Skill: Listening . Writing B/ Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 2. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) 2. Checking up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. III.New lesson (35’) T Teacher’s activities Student’s activities 5’ I. New words: Elicits the vocab Listen and read - procedure (n)qui trình Copy - drain (n)làm ráo nướ - roller (n)trục lăn -vat: (n) bể đựng -convey (V) chuyên chở ,chuyển đi 25 II.listening a. Pre – listening ask sts toPredict the missing words b while- listening - Listen to the tape and check their prediction. Predict the missing words - Correct and fill in the gaps..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span> - Listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Correct and fill in the gaps *. Fill in the gaps: 1, simple 2, same 3, two hundred 4, left 5, rollers - Ss listen again and put the sentences into the correct order. -call on ss to give the answers,correct if nessary. post- listening ask ss to match divide the class into two teams,prepare 6 inventions for each team t read the invention and ask ss to find out the correct inventor immediately. Ss listen again and put the sentences into the correct order. *. Order the sentences: c – Paper pulp was placed in the vat. d – Paper pulp was mixed with water. a – The water was drained. e – The pulp fibers were poured out. g – The pulp was conveyed under the rollers. f – The fibers were smoothed and preesed dry. b – The paper was put on a roll. Ss write about paper making process in their notebooks Ss finf out. IV_Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V-Homework (1’):. - Writes complete dialogues in your notebooks - Do the exercises in the workbook page…..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span> Unit 15: computer. Preparing date: 28/4 /13 Teaching date: 29/4/13 Class 8a1-5. Period 99.. Lesson 3: read. Class: 8a1-5 A / The aims and objectives. 1. The aims: Reading for details about computer 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand more about how computers work in a university. b. Skills: read B/ Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, posters. 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I. Organization : Greeting + checking member (2’) II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) “ Jumbled words “ T: gives instructions. Inform the topic “ Words relating a computer” T: put the cardboards ion the board. Ss: work in team 1. terpirn. 2. seumo. 3. recsnc. 4. nimorot. 5. bdoaryke. 6. moseu dap. *Answer key 1. printer 2. mouse 3. screen III. New lesson (35’). 4. monitor 5. keyboard 6. mouse pad. Teachers’ activities 1) Pre- reading: a) Pre- teach the vocabulary Freshman: ( the 1st –year student at a college/ Jack : æ c¾m ®iÖn Bulletin board: = notice board skeptical: (cã tư tưởng ) hoµi nghi impact: (n) ¶nh hëng uses the steps of teaching vocabulary .. Students’ activities 8’. - Listen and repeat.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span> * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember T: get Ss to copy b) Open prediction: introduce the topic of the text. asks Ss to guess what they are going to read 2’ 2. Suggestion questions: - Where in the library do we get /find information? - How can we store the information? If we want to discuss something , how can we do ? write the Ss’ answer on the board . 2) While- reading: 15’ - Read the text again and decide if the statements true or false. a) There is a new university without a library in the USA recently. b) Users can send and receive messages by using computers . c) First-year students in many universities are required to have access to a computer . d) Students have to go to computer rooms to connect their computers to the computer jacks e) Computer bulletin boards are the same as traditional ones f) Not all people think positively about the new method of study off campus. - collect and correct their mistakes * Answer keys : a.Tb.T c.T d. F e.T f.T Correct d: Students don’t have to go to computer rooms because college campuses now have 10 computer jacks in every part of the university. 4)Post-reading: ( Comprehension questions ) asks Ss to read the questions and find the information in the text to answer . asks Ss to compare their answers with their partners a. What makes the new university different from the others ? b. What type of information is available through the computer? c. What type of equipment is necessary for firstyear students? d. What is the different between a traditional bulletin board and the one on the internet ? e. Would you like to complete a college degree from home ?Why / Why not ?. - remember and copy. read the text carefully and check their guessing .. work individually then share their answers with their partners .. - work in pairs a. It has no library. All the information normally found in a library in now stored in the university computers. b. All the information normally found in a library or messages normally found on a bulletin board. c. A computer or a telephone ( line ) d. With a bulletin board on the internet , a great number of people ( over 20 million can access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly . e. Ss’ answers.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span> IV. Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’): - Write the answers in your note books . - Read the text again to master the vocabulary and the content of the text - Do the exercises in work books. - Be ready lesson 5 “ Write “. Preparing date: 28/4/13 Teaching date: 2/5/13 Period 100. Unit 15: computer Lesson 4: write. Class: 8a1-5 A / The aims and objectives. 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a set of instructions on how to use the printer and complete a flow chart. 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen and write a set of instructions on how to use the printer b. Skills: listen and write B/ Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, cassette, posters. 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I. Organization : Greeting + checking member (2’) II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) III. New lesson (35’). Teachers’ activities 1. Write: *. Pre-teach vocabulary: - paper input tray : khay đặt giấy vào máy - power button: nút khởi động - output path: đờng dẫn giấy (đã in) ra - remove ( to put st away): cÊt ®i, di chuyÓn Checking technique: * Matching - Asks sts to look at exercise 1 (p. 142) and do the matching - Gets some sts to give their answers and corrects Answer key: a. 3 b. 1 c. 6 d. 2 e. 4 f. 5 *Gap fill: - Gets sts to make use of some phrasal verbs - Puts the words on the board and asks sts to fill in the gaps with the right words if possible Phrasal verbs - wait for so/sth. Tim e 7’. Students’ activities - Listen and repeat. - work in pairs. 5’.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(201)</span> - to remove sth - to turn on/off a machine - to plug in sth - to load sth While – writing: 8’ - Asks sts to look at the pictures on page 143 and read the cues Answer key: Answer key Plug in the printer and turn on the power. Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the paper input tray Wait for the power button to flash Have the pages appear on the computer screen Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds The printed paper will get out from the output path 10’ in a minute IV. Consolidation (2’) Retell main points V. Homework (1’):. - work in groups. - work individually then share their answers with their partners ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(202)</span> Date of preparing: 2/5/13 Date of teaching 3/5 /13 Class 8a1-5 Period 101. Unit 15: COMPUTER Language focus 2,3,4. A / The aims and objectives. 1. The aims: Help Ss do exercise in language focus 2,3,4 : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use “ yet “ and “ already “ to express the present perfect . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: using “ yet “ and “ already “ to express the present perfect . b. Skills: write B/ Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, cassette, posters. 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I. Organization : Greeting + checking member (2’) II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) 1. Organization. - Greeting.Good morning - Who is absent today? 2.Checking up the old lesson+ warm up: * Qs : ask ss to retell the instructions on how to use a printer. * Key : Ss’answer. * form of checking: speaking. * T corrects and gives them mark. III. New lesson (35’) Teacher’s activities.. 3.New- Lesson. Warm – up: - Tell Ss each number is for a question but 3 of them are lucky numbers . IF Ss choose a lucky number , they do not have to answer any question but they will get 2 points and they can choose another number . - Devide the class into 2 teams. A/ Presentation: Lucky number :( Consolidation of Tenses ) Questions 1. What does your father do ? 2. What did you do last night ? 3. Lucky number 4. How often is Hue Festival held ?. T. Students’ activities.. 1’. - Good morning.. 5’. - Retell individually.. 8’. - Team work - Write 10 numbers on the board ( 1 to 10 ) - Play game into 2 teams..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(203)</span> 5. Lucky number 6. What were you doing at 8 o,clock last night ? 7. Guess what your parents are doing at the moment ? 8. Who often cooks in your family ? 9. Which grade will you be in next school year ? 10.Lucky number . B/ Practice: Comparisons : Lf 3 p.146 Present perfect tense Use : - finished actions with indefinite time incomplete actions with “for , since , recently” Form : Have / has + Past participle Examples a) I have been to SaPa highlands . b) They have lived in Ca Mau for 10 years . c). She has finished her homework . d) She has worked with the computer since. - Compare with their partner. 15’. Past simple Finished action with definite time .. - Do LF 3 in individual.. Finished action. Incomplete action. v v. - Do individually. - Work in pairs.. v v. Ask ss to compare present perfect tense with past simple. C/ Production: Lf 4 p.146: - Ask ss to complete the dialogue, use the present perfect or past simple of the verbs in brackets. - Get feedback. * Asnwer key: 1. Have … seen …? 2. …did … see …? 3. saw 4. haven’t had 5. have been 6. Have … heard ….? 7. happened ? 8. had 9. fell … broke 10. Has … arrived…? 11. arrived 4. Consolidation:. 12’. - Retell the content of the lesson. - Listen and copy down..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(204)</span> - Ask ss to retell the content of the lesson : What have you leanrt ? 5. Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Prepare for the next period: + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster, cd, cassette. Date of preparing: 3/5/13 Date of teaching 6/5 /13 Class 8a1-5 revision Period 102. A / The aims and objectives. 1. The aims: Help Ss do exercise By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use “ yet “ and “ already “ to express the present perfect . 2. Objectives: a. Language focus: using “ yet “ and “ already “ to express the present perfect . b. Skills: write B/ Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, Text book, cassette, posters. 2. Students’: Textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures: I. Organization : Greeting + checking member (2’) II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) 1. Organization. - Greeting. - Who is absent today? 2.Checking up the old lesson+ warm up: . III. New lesson (35’). Teacher’s activities I-revision Ask sis to review the present perfect and adv with the present perfect Comparison of present perfect and past simple We use the present perfect to express actions with unidentified time and the past simple with identified time. For example. She has seen this film before. (Present perfect) She saw this film 10 years ago. ( past simple ) We use the present perfect to express actions which happened in the past and continued in present and future, but we use the past simple to express actions which happened and finished in the past. For example. She has learnt English for 2 years.. T Students’ activities 10 Ss give form of the present perfect Comparison of present perfect and past simple.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(205)</span> She learned English two years ago. II. exercise III. Fill in each blank with " already" or "yet". 25 1. It's 1:00 o'clock. I'm hungry. I haven't eaten.......................... 2. Idon't have to study tonight. I've ........................ Do ex ■'.. finished all my homework. 3. It's late but he hasn't arrived........................ 4. Has John found a new job..................,............... ? 5. How did you do on your calculus exam? I haven't taken it...................................The exam is tomorrow. 6. Would you like to go to the movie at Bijou with us tonight? No, thanks. I've.................................. seen it. I saw it last week. 7.1 have...............................told him several times that I can't come. 8. Have you finished....................................? It's time to go. IV. Put the verbs into the correct form, present perfect or past simple. 1. I don't know where Amy is. Have you seen (you/see) her? 2. When I.......................(get) home last night, I (be) very tired and I.......................(go) straight to bed. 3. Your car looks very clean ................................................................. (you/wash) it? 4. George......................(not/be) very well last week. 5. Mr. Clark....................... (work) in a bank for 15 years. Then he gave it up. 6. I don't know Carol's sister. I .... ....................................................................... (never/meet) her. Get feedback 4. Consolidation: - Ask ss to retell the content of the lesson : 5. Homework: - do ex in the workbook - Prepare for the next period:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(206)</span> + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster, cd, cassette. + Ss: textbook, notebook, homework…. Date of preparation:04/5/13 Date of teaching: 07/5/12 Class 8a1-5 Period 103-104.. consolidation. Clas 8a1-6 A/ The aim and objectives:. 1.The aim - Review the the main grammar . 2. Objectives a. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structure: in English 8 b. Skill:. 4 skills . B/ Preparation: 3. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 4. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Ask sts to go to board and write the vocab I.Warm up: - Language game: - Present simple. - Past simple. - Present progressive. - Past progressive. - Future simple. - Present perfect III.New lesson (35’) T Teacher’s activities Student’s activities 10’ II. Review Active and passive voice : . Review 1: 1. Present simple: - Review the active voice and the - A : S + V(s,es) +O ...(S + don’t /doesn’t + passive voice in these tenses. V...) - P : S(O) + is / are / am + P2 .... 2. Past simple: - A : S + Ved + O ... ( S + didn’t + V ....) - P : S + was / were + P2 .... 3. Present progressive: - A : S + is / are / am + V-ing + O .... - P : S + is / are am + being + P2 .... 4. Past progressive: - A : S + was / were + V-ing + O .... - P : S + was / were + being + P2 .... 5. Future simple: - A : S + will ( can/ may/ ... ) + V + O.... - P : S + will (... ) + be + P2 .....
<span class='text_page_counter'>(207)</span> 6. Present perfect : - A : S + have / has + P2 + O ... - P : S + have / has + been + P2 .... Reported speech: . Review 2 : 1. Statements: back one tense. - Review direct speech and Present simple -> Past simple reported speech Present progressive -> Past progressive Form of the verbs: +V-ing : mind / enjoy / like / ... + V-ing + to – V : want /intent / hope / ... + to – + Past participle, passive voice, present perfect, ... 1. Choose from the four options given (mark A, B, C, or D ) one best answer to complete each sentence by circling the Practice corresponding letter A, B, C, or D: 25’ III. Practice 1. She has just .... the letter. Exercise 1 A.write B. to write C. writing D.written Ask sts to do ex 2. The bicycle ... in Japan is $ 100. Get feedback A. make B. made C. making D. to 1.D 2.B 3. D 4. A 5.A 6. C make 3. We ... dinner when the phone rang. A. are having B. had C. have had D. were having 4. He said that he ... for a car company. A. worked B. works C. is working D. has worked 5. Nhi asked Nga if My Son .... in Quang Nam province. Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentence A. was B. has been C. is D. will be 1. I am invited to the party by 6. This letter .... by Phuong. him A. writes B. wrote C. was writtenD. writing 2. Mai asked Lan if Many Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentence tourists were visited cave every 1. she invites me to the party ->I… year 2. “Do many tourists visit Phong Nha cave 3. I have played the piano for two every year ,Lan ?->Mai asked Lan …… years 3. I started playing the piano Two years ago 4. Eiffel Tower was designed and .->I have …… built by the Frend Civil …..in 4. The Frend Civil Alexandra Gustarve 1889 designed and built Eiffel Tower in 1889 Exercise 3:put the verbs in the ->Eiffel Tower ………………………….. brankets Exercise 3 1 came 2. have 3. has worked 4. 1. She (come) to France two yearsy ago plays 2. I(just send ) the letter . 3. He (work ) for that company for 5 years 4. Tom (play )football every afternoon VI consolidation.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(208)</span> Ask sts to retell what they’ve learnt VII. homework Revision all grammar Repare the test Date of preparation:07/5 Date of teaching: 09/5 Period 104.. consolidation. A/ The aim and objectives:. 1.The aim - Review the the main grammar . 2. Objectives a. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structure: in English 8 b. Skill:. 4 skills . B/ Preparation: 5. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 6. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Ask sts to go to board and write the vocab I.Warm up: - Language game: - Present simple. - Past simple. - Present progressive. - Past progressive. - Future simple. - Present perfect III.New lesson (35’) T Teacher’s activities Student’s activities 10’ II. Review Active and passive voice : . Review 1: 1. Present simple: - Review the active voice and the - A : S + V(s,es) +O ...(S + don’t /doesn’t + passive voice in these tenses. V...) - P : S(O) + is / are / am + P2 .... 2. Past simple: - A : S + Ved + O ... ( S + didn’t + V ....) - P : S + was / were + P2 .... 3. Present progressive: - A : S + is / are / am + V-ing + O .... - P : S + is / are am + being + P2 .... 4. Past progressive: - A : S + was / were + V-ing + O .... - P : S + was / were + being + P2 .... 5. Future simple:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(209)</span> - A : S + will ( can/ may/ ... ) + V + O.... - P : S + will (... ) + be + P2 .... 6. Present perfect : - A : S + have / has + P2 + O ... - P : S + have / has + been + P2 .... . Review 2 : - Review direct speech and reported speech. Reported speech: 1. Statements: back one tense. Present simple -> Past simple Present progressive -> Past progressive Form of the verbs: +V-ing : mind / enjoy / like / ... + V-ing + to – V : want /intent / hope / ... + to – + Past participle, passive voice, present perfect, ... 1. Choose from the four options given (mark A, B, C, or D ) one best answer to Practice complete each sentence by circling the 25’ III. Practice corresponding letter A, B, C, or D: Exercise 1 1. She has just .... the letter. Ask sts to do ex A.write B. to write C. writing D.written Get feedback 2. The bicycle ... in Japan is $ 100. 1.D 2.B 3. D 4. A 5.A 6. C A. make B. made C. making D. to make 3. We ... dinner when the phone rang. A. are having B. had C. have had D. were having 4. He said that he ... for a car company. A. worked B. works C. is working D. has worked 5. Nhi asked Nga if My Son .... in Quang Nam province. A. was B. has been C. is D. will be 6. This letter .... by Phuong. Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentence A. writes B. wrote C. was writtenD. writing 1. I am invited to the party by Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentence him 1. she invites me to the party ->I… 2. Mai asked Lan if Many 2. “Do many tourists visit Phong Nha cave tourists were visited cave every every year ,Lan ?->Mai asked Lan …… year 3. I started playing the piano Two years ago 3. I have played the piano for two .->I have …… years 4. The Frend Civil Alexandra Gustarve 4. Eiffel Tower was designed and designed and built Eiffel Tower in 1889 built by the Frend Civil …..in ->Eiffel Tower ………………………….. 1889 Exercise 3 Exercise 3:put the verbs in the 1. She (come) to France two yearsy ago brankets 2. I(just send ) the letter ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(210)</span> 1 came 2. have 3. has worked 4. plays. 3. He (work ) for that company for 5 years 4. Tom (play )football every afternoon. VI consolidation Ask sts to retell what they’ve learnt VII. homework Revision all grammar Repare the test. Preparing date: 23/4 Teaching date : 26/4. Unit 16 : inventions. Period 99. Lesson 1: getting started + listen and read A/ The aim and objectives:. 1.The aim: Reading for details about development of paper and how to produce chocolate.. 2. Objectives a. Language focus: - Ss can know the origin of paper and talk about the process of producing something.. b. Skill: listen, speak B/ Preparation:. 1. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, poster, 2. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures. I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II. Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) " Who invented.......?". 1. Light bulb Humphry Davy, an English scientist, in 1800. 2. Sewing machine Isaac Meritt Singer. 3. Telephone A.Graham Bell III. New lesson (35’) Teacher’s activities T Students’ activities 15’ - Read the sentences (A E) 1. Pre-reading..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(211)</span> □ Getting started: and match them with the correct pictures. - Where are they from? (picture a, b, c, e). - What is the man in picture a) doing? - What is it? (d) □ Answer key: A. b) B. c) C. e) D. a) E. d) Listen and read 1, 2. - To remove - To crush: Ðp, nghiÒn - Listen and repeat. - To liquefy: ho¸ láng - Copy down. -To grind - ground - ground. nghiÒn nhá - To manufacture = to produce - A process manufacturing process - A mold: khuon - Conveyor belt. b¨ng chuyÒn - foreman: quản đốc phân xởng □ Set the scene: Jim - Jones is visiting a chocolate factory with his class and his teacher. 2. While-reading: 15’ - Read the dialogue and Matching (Exercise 2 on page 149). match the half sentences. a) E b) D c) C - Compare their answers for d) F the class. e) B f) A 3. Post reading. chocolate Manufacturing Process. + Grid: Chocolate manufacturing process - Puts the grid on the board and have sts to copy - Asks sts to read the dialogue again and fill in the grid - Calls ss to go to the board to write their answers - Gives feedback and corrects. Answer key:. - Read the dialogue again and fill in the grid. Go to the board and write their answers. 1…. Washed…..cooked. 2. …are removed 3. …. Crushed and liquified 4. ……. - Compare their answer with.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(212)</span> 1. The beans are washed, weighed and cooked 2. The shells are removed 3. The beans are crushed and liquified 4. Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are added 5. The mixture is ground, rolled and poured into the molds. 4- lf1 ask ss to do lf1 The passive form in the past S + was/were + V-pp + O The passive form in the future S + will be + V-pp + O *Answer key a) were performed b) was decorated, put c) was made d) will be held e) awarded f) was written IV. Consolidation (2’) retell main points V. Homework (1’) Rewrite the grid using sequence markers ( First, next, then, finally…). Preparing date:24/4 Teaching date : 27/4 Period 100. A/ The aim and objectives:. their partners. - Copy down the answer key. 5’ -Students to do exercises in pairs and give the answer key.. Unit 16 : inventions Lesson :speak. 1.The aim: Further practice in seeking information about famous places or people using “Yes / No” questions both in “direct speech” and “indirect speech” 2. Objectives a. Language focus: - Ss can talk about the inventions the passive. b. Skill: speak B/ Preparation: 7. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 8. Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) * Qs : ask ss to retell the process of producing chocolate. * Key : 1. The beans are washed, weighed and cooked 2. The shells are removed 3. The beans are crushed and liquified 4. Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are added 5. The mixture is ground, rolled and poured into the molds. * form of checking: speaking. * T corrects and gives them mark.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(213)</span> + warm up * Chatting : Do you know ..... Who invented bicylcle ? Who invented color T.V ? Who invented helicopter ? III.New lesson (35’) Teacher’s activities Time Students’ activities 1. Vocabulary 10’ - Listen and repeat - Facsimile: may fax - Reinforced concrete: bê tông cốt thép - Microphone: micrô - X-ray: máy x-quang - Loudspeaker: loa phóng thanh - Helicopter: máy bay trực thăng - Study the meaning of the - Optical fiber: sợi quang inventions. - Laser: la de Grammar Awareness Read the dialogue again and pick out of the 5’ -Read the dialogue on page passive sentences: 148 again and pick out all 1. This is where the cocoa beans are stored. of the passive sentences. 2. That button cannot be touched. -Read the model dialogue 3. The beans are washed, weighed and cooked on page 149 here. -Ask and answer questions 4. After the shells are removed... into molds. about the inventions to fill in the missing information. 2. While- speaking: Word-cue Drill 10’ Ask and answer questions to fill in the Complete the table, Use the missing information in the tables on page 150 complete table to report and 156. what they have found. T. What was invented by Friedrich Koenig? S. Printing Press. T. When was it invited? 10’ S. In 1810. S. Where was Koenig from? T. He was from Germany. 3. Post- speaking Making reports. Eg: The printing Press was invented by Friedrich Koenig in 1810. IV.Consolidation (2’) retell main points V.Homework (1’).
<span class='text_page_counter'>(214)</span> - Do the exercises 3, 4 in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period. Preparing date: 01/05 Teaching date : 03/05 Period 101. A/ The aim and objectives:. Unit 16 : inventions Lesson :read. 1.The aim Help Ss read a poem about inventions to understand the details and revise the passive form By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to read a poem about inventions to understand the details and revise the passive form 2. Objectives a. Language focus: - read a poem about inventions b. Skill: read B/ Preparation: 9. Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 10.Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) * Qs : ask ss to speak the vocabulary period 100 * Key: Ss’ answer. * form of checking: speaking. * T corrects and gives them mark..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(215)</span> Warm – up Brainstorm * The inventions you know : - The invention of the medicine - The invention of engine - The invention of telephone - The invention of paper - The invention of household (microwave, hairdryer, dishwasher…) - The invention of TV - T gets feedback. III.New lesson (35’) Teacher’s activities. T Students’ activities. .New- Lesson A .Pre- reading : 10 - Do individually. * Pre-teach vocabulary: T presents some new words. - be-doom, ping, chugga-chug, vroom, boom, : nh÷ng từ tợng thanh (âm của các vật đợc phát ra) - microwave (n)vi sóng - vacuum (n) máy hút bụi -hairdryer (n) sáy sấy tóc - Play game. -toaster (n) máy nướng bánh mì -appliance (n)dụng cụ * Set the scene: Open prediction : What machines are mentioned in the poems ? Ask ss to guess the matching the headings to the verses 15 Ss guess B .While – reading : - Ask sts to read the text then check their predictions Then do matching. - Listen and repeat in Read 1: Answer key: verse 1 – b verse 2 – c verse chorus, then individual. 3-a - Guess the meaning. * Gap – filling: - Ask ss to read again and then do the exercise 1 - Copy down. Read 2 a. vacuum b. telephone - Rewrite words. c. dishwasher d. microwave - Listen and answer the e. hairdryer qs. f. toaster 10 - Predict the answer. C .Production: *Discussion: - T gives the qs , then ask ss to discuss about it. - Read the text and check What are the household appliances mentioned in the their predictions. poems used for ? Eg: A microwave is used to cook or heat food - Give feedback - Read the text again then do ex 1 individual..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(216)</span> 4. Consolidation: -Ask ss to retell the content of the lesson : What have you leant ? 5. Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Prepare for the next period: + T: lesson plan, textbook, poster. + Ss: textbook, notebook, homework…. Preparing date:01/05 Teaching date:04/05 Period 102. Unit 16: invention Lesson: listen +write. A/ The aim and objectives:. 1.The aim - Giving Ss to practice in writing about a process, using the sequence markers and Listening for details and revision of passive form 2. Objectives a. Language focus: writing about a process, using the sequence markers and Listening for details and revision of passive form b. Skill: Listening . Writing B/ Preparation: 11.Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 12.Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) 2. Checking up ( 5’ ) - 2 sts come to the board to write new words and do exercises. - T remarks and gives marks. III.New lesson (35’).
<span class='text_page_counter'>(217)</span> T 5’. Teacher’s activities. I. New words: Elicits the vocab - procedure (n)qui trình - drain (n)làm ráo nướ - roller (n)trục lăn - smooth (v)làm phặng - whiten (v) tinh, läc - flatten (v) ñ cho lªn men - refine (v) rang , quay - roast (v) lµm tr¾ng - ferment (v) lµm len men II.listening 10 a. Pre – listening ask sts toPredict the missing words b while- listening - Listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Correct and fill in the gaps.. - Ss listen again and put the sentences into the correct order.. post- listening - Write it up. 10’ III writing : a. pre –writing Ss read the passage and fill in each gap with one of these sequence. Student’s activities Listen and read Copy. Predict the missing words - Listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Correct and fill in the gaps *. Fill in the gaps: 1, simple 2, same 3, two hundred 4, left 5, rollers Ss listen again and put the sentences into the correct order. *. Order the sentences: c – Paper pulp was placed in the vat. d – Paper pulp was mixed with water. a – The water was drained. e – The pulp fibers were poured out. g – The pulp was conveyed under the rollers. f – The fibers were smoothed and preesed dry. b – The paper was put on a roll. Ss write about paper making process in their notebooks Fill in the gap with one of these sequence markers to describe the procedure of paper making ..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(218)</span> markers to describe the procedure of paper making. b.While- writing - What can you see in the pictures? -> Help Ss rearrange the sentences to fit the pictures. -> Describe how cacao beans are processed.. c. Post- writing: (13’) - ask Ss to write to describe how white rice is produced in the traditional way. Using the sequence markers.. 1, First 4, After this 2, Then 5, Then 3, Next 6, Finally . Look at the sequence of pictures that describe how cacao beans are processed. Put them in the correct order. - Write the chocolate making process. d, The fuit harvest is fermented for three to nine days to kill the beans and turn them brown. a, The beans are dried in the sun. e, The beans are cleared in special machines. c, The beans are roasted to bring out the chocolate flavor. b, They are shelled and ground to produce chocolate liquor. f, The liquor is made into chocolate candy or cocoa powder write to describe how white rice is produced in the traditional way. Using the sequence markers. VI consolidation Ask sts to retell what they’ve learnt VII. homework Preparing date:03/5 Unit 16: inventions Teaching date: 06/5 Period 103 Lesson : language focus A/ The aim and objectives:. 1.The aim - Review the passive voice and do execise in the book . 2. Objectives a. Language focus: Passive forms. b. Skill:. Writing B/ Preparation: 13.Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 14.Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Ask sts to go to board and write the vocab Warm up: (8’) - Chatting. + How to use the passive voice? + What is the form?.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(219)</span> III.New lesson (35’) T Teacher’s activities 10’ I. revision Active or passive? Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets to complete these sentences. Student’s activities Passive voice: *. Form: S + be + P2.... ( be: according to the tenses of the active forms) Ex : Passive voice in past simple: S + was / were + P2 ...... II. practice 25’ Put the question for each underlined phrase in the sentence. Ex: - The facsimile was invented by Alexander Bain in 1843. When was the facsimile invented. , Language focus 2: a, was awarded b, won c, ran d, was run – was sold e, was close / closed , Language focus 3: a, What was invented by W. L. Judson in1893? b, What was brought into Viet Nam by Phung Khac Hoan? - When was maize / it brought into Viet Nam? c, Who invented the fountain- pen? - When was the fountain – pen invented ? d, Where was the ball –point – pen invented?. Ss write to describe how white rice is produced in the traditional way. Using the sequence markers. e, In which machine is xerography widely used Language focus 4: *. Use the sequence markers to describe how white rice is produred in traditional way. First, the rice crop is harvested. Then the rice plants are threshed ( to seperate the grains from the traw) Next , the rice grains are husked in the mill to produce brown rice. After this, the bran is removed in the mortar and it is finally winnowed to produce white rice..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(220)</span> VI consolidation Ask sts to retell what they’ve learnt VII. homework Do all exercises agains Revion the main grammars. Date of preparation:07/5 Date of teaching: 09/5 Period 104.. consolidation. A/ The aim and objectives:. 1.The aim - Review the the main grammar . 2. Objectives a. Language focus: - Vocabulary and structure: in English 8 b. Skill:. 4 skills . B/ Preparation: 15.Teacher’s: Lesson plan, word cues. 16.Students’: textbooks, workbooks and other tools. C/ Procedures I. Organization (2’) Greeting + checking member. II.Checking the old lesson + warm up (5’) Ask sts to go to board and write the vocab I.Warm up: - Language game: - Present simple..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(221)</span> - Past simple. - Present progressive. - Past progressive. - Future simple. - Present perfect III.New lesson (35’) T Teacher’s activities 10’ II. Review . Review 1: - Review the active voice and the passive voice in these tenses.. . Review 2 : - Review direct speech and reported speech. Practice 25’ III. Practice Exercise 1 Ask sts to do ex Get feedback 1.D 2.B 3. D 4. A 5.A 6. C. Student’s activities Active and passive voice : 1. Present simple: - A : S + V(s,es) +O ...(S + don’t /doesn’t + V...) - P : S(O) + is / are / am + P2 .... 2. Past simple: - A : S + Ved + O ... ( S + didn’t + V ....) - P : S + was / were + P2 .... 3. Present progressive: - A : S + is / are / am + V-ing + O .... - P : S + is / are am + being + P2 .... 4. Past progressive: - A : S + was / were + V-ing + O .... - P : S + was / were + being + P2 .... 5. Future simple: - A : S + will ( can/ may/ ... ) + V + O.... - P : S + will (... ) + be + P2 .... 6. Present perfect : - A : S + have / has + P2 + O ... - P : S + have / has + been + P2 .... Reported speech: 1. Statements: back one tense. Present simple -> Past simple Present progressive -> Past progressive Form of the verbs: +V-ing : mind / enjoy / like / ... + V-ing + to – V : want /intent / hope / ... + to – + Past participle, passive voice, present perfect, ... 1. Choose from the four options given (mark A, B, C, or D ) one best answer to complete each sentence by circling the corresponding letter A, B, C, or D: 1. She has just .... the letter. A.write B. to write C. writing D.written 2. The bicycle ... in Japan is $ 100. A. make B. made C. making D. to make 3. We ... dinner when the phone rang..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(222)</span> A. are having B. had C. have had D. were having 4. He said that he ... for a car company. A. worked B. works C. is working D. has worked 5. Nhi asked Nga if My Son .... in Quang Nam province. A. was B. has been C. is D. will be 6. This letter .... by Phuong. Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentence A. writes B. wrote C. was writtenD. writing 1. I am invited to the party by Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentence him 1. she invites me to the party ->I… 2. Mai asked Lan if Many 2. “Do many tourists visit Phong Nha cave tourists were visited cave every every year ,Lan ?->Mai asked Lan …… year 3. I started playing the piano Two years ago 3. I have played the piano for two .->I have …… years 4. The Frend Civil Alexandra Gustarve 4. Eiffel Tower was designed and designed and built Eiffel Tower in 1889 built by the Frend Civil …..in ->Eiffel Tower ………………………….. 1889 Exercise 3 Exercise 3:put the verbs in the 1. She (come) to France two yearsy ago brankets 2. I(just send ) the letter . 1 came 2. have 3. has worked 4. 3. He (work ) for that company for 5 years plays 4. Tom (play )football every afternoon VI consolidation Ask sts to retell what they’ve learnt VII. homework Revision all grammar Repare the test.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(223)</span> Planning 31/3/2013 Teaching:3/04/2013 Period:60 revision. A/The aims and objectives: 1)The aims: - Helps students review the relative pronouns,defining and non – defining relative clauses and adverb clause of concession. - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to do some exercises. - They have a chance to do the exercises. 2Objectives a)Language focus:Exercises in relative clauses and adverb clause of concession. b)Skill:writing B/Preparation:.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(224)</span> 1-Teacher: Lesson plan, English book, the over head. 2-Students: Textbooks, notebooks, and exercise books. C/ Procedures: I) Organization (1’): - Good morning! Sit down, please! - What’s the date today? - Who’s absent today? II) Checking up and warm up (9’): Do exercise 3,4 page 81-82(English book). III) New lesson (30’):. Teacher and students’ activities T Activity 1: 5’ T asks ss to give out the use of Relative clause Ss answer T’s questions. Activity 2: Ss distinguish between defining relative clauses, and non – defining relative clauses. Ss copy in their notebooks. Activity 3: T asks ss to answer the question What is the Adverbial Clause of concessions used for? Ss answer Activity 4: T gives out the exercises. Ss do them. Content. I) Grammar: 1. Relative clauses: + Who is used for people. + Which is used for thing + That is used for both Who or Which. 2. Defining and non – defining relative 5’ clauses: - Asks students to distingwish defining and non – defining relative clauses. - Defining relative clauses identify nouns and these clauses tell us which person or thing the speaker means. - Non – defining relative clauses give more information about a person or thing already identified when we write these clauses, we put commas at the beginning of the clause and often at the end of the clause. - We can not use “ that” in a non – defining relative clause. - In a non – defining relative clause we can not leave out Who or Which. 3. Adverbial Clause of concessions 5’ even though though + clause1, clause2 although Mệnh đề trạng ngữ chỉ nhợng bộ: là mệnh đề phô b¾t ®Çu b»ng c¸c tõ : even though, though, although. Các liên từ này có thể đứng đầu câu hoÆc gi÷a c©u. II) Exercise: 15’ 1. Use the suitable relative pronouns to join the two sentences. a.This is the magazine. I told you about it. b.John’s flat is much larger. It is in the same block as mine. c.The girl turned out to be an old friend. I offered to carry her bag. d.Brighton is a popular holiday resort. It is on.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(225)</span> T corrects. Ss copy in their notebooks. the South coast. e.My bike had disappeared. I had left it in the gate. f.The bag was found outside the bank. The robbers put the money in it. g.It was a wonderful present. I was extremely grateful for it. h.That’s the shop. I got my shoes from. 2.Re-write these sentences using “but” or although: a.They lost although they played well. b.They thought the exam had been easy, but they all failed. c.Even though she smoked, drank and never took exercise, she lived to be 100. d.The police knew she was guilty, they couldn’t prove anything.. IV) Consolidation (2’): Relative pronouns:WHO, WHICH, THAT and distinguish between defining relative clauses, and non – defining relative clauses and adverb clause of concession. V) Homework (2’): - Prepare for the Writing test. Planning:6/4/2013 Teaching:8/4/2013 Period:61. KiÓm tra 1 tiÕt bµi sè 4 A) The aims: : - To check students’ understanding. - To tell teacher what students can or can not do, what need to be taught in the future and how much progress the teaching has been. - They have a chance to the test and check their learning. B.content: I Choose the best answer. 1. ...... the girl isn’t beautiful, I like her voice. A. Although B. Because C. But D. Therefore 2. The picture ........ Lawra painted is being shown in an exhibition. A. that B. which C. what D. A & B 3. Do you still remember the place ........ we first met? A. when B. whom C. which D. where 4. The week .......... they went camping was the wettest of the year. A. which B. when C. that D. who 5. The party........ wasn’t very enjoyable..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(226)</span> A. we went. B. which we went C. where we went D. that we went to to last night to party lastnight 6. Thousands of people came to see the Queen …… the rain. A. owing B. because C. in spite of D. according to II. Combine two sentences using ralative pronouns: 1. The shoes were made in Italy. I bought it yesterday. …………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. Ha Long Bay is the world’s heritage. It consists of hundreds of beautiful islands. …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. We couldn’t find the man. His car was blocking our driveway. …………………………………………………………………………………………. 4. People advoid traveling by plane. People fear flying. …………………………………………………………………………………………. III. Read the text then answer the questions below: We can usually predict when a vocalno will erupt.Mount Pinatubo,which is a volcano in the Philipines, erupted in 1991. It was the world’s largest volcanic eruption in more than 50 years. Hundred of people died but thousands were saved as because scientits had warned them about the eruption. 1.Can we predict when a volcano erupt? …………………………………………………………………………………………. 2.When did Mount Pinatubo erupt? …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3.How was the eruption of Mount Pinatubo? …………………………………………………………………………………………. 4.Did many people die? …………………………………………………………………………………………. IV. Fill in each gap with who/ which/whose to complete the sentences. 1. I was sitting in a chair........... suddenly collapsed. 2. Hoi An, ……. I visited last month, is a nice old city. 3. The man …… lives next door to us is a weathercaster on a local television station. 4. Thuy,……...hair is long, is my friend. V. Write sentences using the given words. 1. Tuan/ Linh/ who/ not come/ class/ yesterday/ be/ bad studednts. …………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. Though/ weather/ not fine/ they/ have/ picnic/ last Saturday. …………………………………………………………………………………………..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(227)</span> Planning:5/4/2013 Teaching:9/4/2013 Period:62 Unit 10: Life on other planets. Lesson 1: Getting started, listen and read. A/The aims and objectives: 1) The aims: - Helps students know some vocabulary about life on other planets. - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about UFOs. - They have a chance to listen,read and speak with their friends. 2)Objectives a)language focus - Conditional sentence type 1, 2. - May/ might. b)Skill:listening and reading B/Preparation: 1-Teacher: Lesson plan, English book, pictures and cassette, tape, and the overhead. 2-Students: Textbooks, notebooks, and exercise books. C/ Procedures: 1) Organization: (1’) - Good morning! Sit down, please! - What’s the date today? - Who’s absent today? II/Warm up (5’): * Getting started: 1. What can you see in the pictures? - I can see UFOs in the pictures. 2. What do we call them in Vietnamese?.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(228)</span> - We call them “ Dia bay” in Vietnamese 3. Do you know another word for UFOs? - Flying Saucer. 4. Do you think they really exist? - Yes, I do 3) New lesson (35’):. Teacher and students’ activities Activity 1: T uses picture, translation and synonym techniques to elicit vocabs from ss.. T Content 7’ I. Vocabulary: - ‘spacecraft ['speis'krɑ:ft]: tàu vũ trụ -’ meteor (n) ['mi:tjɔ:]: sao băng. - ‘evidence (n) ['evidəns]: bằng chứng. T models.Ss repeat chorusly and - ‘alien (n) ['eiljən]: người ở hành tinh kh¸c. individually - (to) ‘capture ['kæpt∫ə](v) : bắt. - de’vice [di'vais](n): dụng cụ, thiết bị Ss go to the board and rewrite Activity 2: - (to) claim [kleim]: qu¶ quyÕt lµ, nhËn lµ’. T introduces the text. 1’ * Check vocabulary: Rub out and remember. Asks students to listen to the II.Listen and read (P.83-84) tape and practice the text in individually. 1.Listen and read (P.83-84) T calls some of them to read the 4’ *Matching:Match the new words with their text. suitable meanings: T asks ss to match the new weather ballon(n): sù tån t¹i words with their suitable e’xistence(n): kinh khÝ cÇu meanings. ‘aircrarf(n): sù nh×n thÊy T corrects. sightings(n): m¸y bay Activity 3: 2.Find the words in the text having the following - Asks student to read the text and find the word the same meanings (P.84) meaning with the word given. 1. Evidence – proof, support 5’ T corrects 2. Meteor – falling star or shooting star. Activity 4: 3. Aliens – unknown, strange people or things. Asks students to do the exercise 2 in page 84. 4. Collecting – bringing together or gathering. Ss practise in pairs to do the 5. Captured – caught as prisoner. exercise 2 6. Disappeared – became impossible to see. 3.Complete the note: 8’ a. An aircraft, a weather balloon or a meteor b-nine large round objects traveling at about 2,800 meters an hour. T corrects c. 1,500 UFO sightings worldwide in 1952. d. a UFO above their house. e. an egg – shaped object in one of his fields and also aliens collecting soil samples in 1964. Activity 4: f. claimed they were captured by aliens and Ss do the exercise, choose the taken aboard a spacecraft. best answer g-and his plane disappeared after sighting a UFO T corrects h. that he saw a plate- like device at a tree top Activity 5: 30 meters away T gives out the model sentence 4. Choose the best answer: Ss copy 1.A woman and her children believed they saw A UFOs above their house..
<span class='text_page_counter'>(229)</span> A.1954 B.1955 C.1952 D.1964 7’ 2.There were more than 1,500 UFO sightings around the world. A.1952 B.1950 C.1964 D.1971 3.Two men claimed they were captured by aliens and taken aboard a spacecraft. A.1952 B.1954 C.1964 D.1971 III.Grammer: If people see a UFO, it might be an aircraft. If I saw a UFOs, I would take photos of them or put them on camera. - Conditional sentence type 1, 2. - May/ might. IV) Consolidation (2’): UFOs. The conditional sentence type 1,2. V) Homework (2’):.
<span class='text_page_counter'>(230)</span>